JP7534885B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine to which an accessory can be attached.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines to which accessory members can be attached are known (see Patent Document 1).
This gaming machine is provided with an operation unit (accessory member) including operation means that can be operated by a player. In particular, the operation unit is detachably attached to an operation unit attachment portion of the gaming machine main body.

JP 2017-205673 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that the presentation effect may be reduced.
In other words, in conventional gaming machines, when a display effect is executed in which an image resembling an operation unit is displayed, if the type of operation unit attached to the operation unit attachment section is changed, there is a risk that the content of the image displayed in the display effect will not match the type of operation unit attached, thereby reducing the effectiveness of the display effect.
An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the presentation effect.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the first invention comprises a frame body to which any one of a plurality of types of accessory members can be attached, a detection means capable of detecting the type of accessory member attached to the frame body as the accessory member is attached to the frame body, and a presentation means capable of executing a presentation corresponding to the type detected by the detection means, wherein the detection means includes a switch circuit provided on the frame body and a switching means provided on the accessory member, and the switching means is capable of switching the contact portion of the switch circuit between a conductive state and a non-conductive state as the accessory member is attached to the frame body .
In the gaming machine according to the first invention, the type of the attached accessory is determined, and a performance corresponding to the determined type can be executed. This makes it possible to change the mode of a specific performance to a mode corresponding to the type of the attached accessory, and prevents a decrease in the performance effect of the specific performance.
Here, the frame body corresponds to the front frame unit 4 (front frame) described later. The determination means corresponds to the decorative unit detection switch 35 or the tray unit detection switch 36 described later. The performance control means corresponds to the performance control board 300 described later.

The present invention makes it possible to prevent a decline in the presentation effect.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and diagrammatically illustrates parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a firing condition detection circuit and a firing control circuit. FIG. A block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. 2 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. 13 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 13 is a flowchart showing a save process at the time of power interruption. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dynamic port output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Figure 1. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. A flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped. A flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening/closing switching process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening control process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric devices. 13 is a flowchart showing normal electric utility opening and closing switching processing. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric device opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub-CPU initialization process. 13 is a flowchart showing an initial transfer process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a Vsync interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command construction task process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sound interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a lamp interruption process. 13 is a flowchart showing a movable body interrupt process. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a sound circuit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing types of frequency correction parameters. FIG. 13 illustrates the channel router settings. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a ducking function. A diagram showing the contents of a command list corresponding to sound effects A and B. 13 is a view showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in a closed position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in the minimum open position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the first opening/closing member 80 arranged in the maximum open position. FIG. 13 is a view showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in a closed position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the minimum open position. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the second opening/closing member 90 arranged in the maximum open position. FIG. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view showing the firing handle unit. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the firing handle unit with the face cover removed. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of setting an operation torque according to the second embodiment. FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. A diagram showing the arrangement of guide holes gh in the outer rail. FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG. 1. FIG. 74 is an enlarged view of FIG. 73. 13 is a flowchart showing a material replacement offset setting process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a type of effect customization. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a first custom interface image IF1. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition of displays in a first custom state. FIG. 13 shows a transition of display when the first custom state is ended. A figure showing an example of a second custom interface image IF2. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition of display in a second custom state in the first example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a transition of display in a second custom state according to the second example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a custom change message image cm. FIG. 13 illustrates a transition of display when the second custom state is ended. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the transition of the display of the customization change message image cm when the second customization state ends. FIG. 86 shows the transition of display when the fourth custom state is ended. FIG. 13 shows a transition of the display of the customization change message image cm when the fourth customization state ends.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.

(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is composed of an outer frame unit 2, a main frame unit (not shown), and a game board unit 10.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame unit 2 (outer frame) is fixed to an island equipment of an amusement facility.
The main body frame unit is configured to include an inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) and a front frame unit 4 (front frame). The main body frame unit (main body frame) is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The main body frame unit is disposed on the front side of the outer frame unit 2. This allows the main body frame unit to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2.

The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The inner frame unit 3 is disposed on the front side of the outer frame unit 2. A game board unit 10 is attached to the inner frame unit 3. This allows the inner frame unit 3 to open and close the front side of the outer frame unit 2.
The front frame unit 4 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (front frame). The front frame unit 4 is attached to the outer frame unit 2 via a hinge mechanism. The front frame unit 4 is disposed on the front side of the inner frame unit 3. This allows the front frame unit 4 to open and close the front side of the inner frame unit 3 (in particular, the front side of the game board unit 10 attached to the inner frame unit 3).
The front frame unit 4 is configured to include a pair of transparent plates g1 and g2. The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are disposed in approximately the center of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when viewed from the front side. The pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 are disposed parallel to each other along the depth direction. Each of the transparent plates g1 and g2 is formed in a flat plate shape using a transparent material such as resin or glass.
Furthermore, the front frame unit 4 is configured to include a decorative unit DU, a tray unit SU, and a launch handle unit 6. The decorative unit DU, the tray unit SU, and the launch handle unit 6 are attached to the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame).
In particular, the decorative unit DU and the tray unit SU are removably attached to the front frame unit 4.

(Configuration of decoration unit DU)
Next, the configuration of the decoration unit DU will be described.
The decorative unit DU is disposed so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2. The decorative unit DU includes a design part (decorative part) 40, a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3), and a frame rank 20 (see FIG. 3).
The design portion 40 is disposed around the transparent plates g1 and g2. The design portion 40 is made of a resin material and has a shape that bulges (protrudes) toward the front side. A sound release portion 4c is provided at each corner on the upper side of the design portion 40. Each sound release portion 4c is provided with a plurality of sound release holes that allow the sound output by the speaker 22 to pass through.
The speakers 22 are disposed inside each sound-removing portion 4c. The frame lamp 20 is disposed inside the design portion 40. The frame lamp 20 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

(Configuration of the tray unit SU)
Next, the configuration of the tray unit SU will be described.
Fig. 57 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the closed position. Fig. 58 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the minimum open position. Fig. 59 is a diagram showing the first opening and closing member 80 arranged in the maximum open position. Fig. 60 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the closed position. Fig. 61 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the minimum open position. Fig. 62 is a diagram showing the second opening and closing member 90 arranged in the maximum open position.
The tray unit SU is disposed below the transparent plates g1 and g2.
The tray unit SU includes a tray capable of storing game balls (loan balls and prize balls) dispensed by a game ball dispenser 440 described later. In this embodiment, the tray includes two trays (upper tray 8 and lower tray 9).
Here, if the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 has not reached a predetermined number (if the upper tray 8 is not full), the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 will flow into the upper tray 8, and if the number of game balls stored in the upper tray 8 has reached a predetermined number (if the upper tray 8 is full), the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 will flow into the lower tray 9.

The upper tray 8 is formed in a tray shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the upper tray 8 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the upper tray 8 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that flow into the upper tray 8 flow down the bottom surface of the upper tray 8 from the left side to the right side. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the upper tray 8 is the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down, and the right side of the upper tray 8 is the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down. That is, the game balls that flow into the upper tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a described later flow down the bottom surface of the upper tray 8 from the upstream side to the downstream side.
A first dispensing hole 8a and a first discharge hole 8b are provided in the wall surface on the rear side of the upper receiving tray 8.
The first payout hole 8a is provided at the upstream end of the upper tray 8 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the upper tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a.
The first discharge hole 8b is provided at the downstream end of the upper tray 8 (the downstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the upper tray 8 can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b to the outside of the upper tray 8. Specifically, the first discharge hole 8b is connected to the second payout hole 9a (described later) via a guide path (not shown) provided on the back side of the upper tray 8. As a result, the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b pass through the guide path and flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a. As a result, it is possible to discharge the game balls from the upper tray 8 to the lower tray 9 through the first discharge hole 8b.
In particular, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that allows the game balls to pass through (discharge) one by one. In other words, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that makes it impossible to pass through (discharge) two or more game balls at the same time. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the first discharge hole 8b is 14 mm.

57 to 59, a first opening/closing member 80 capable of opening and closing the first discharge hole 8b is provided on the rear side of the upper tray 8. Here, Figures 57 to 59 show the state of the upper tray 8 as viewed from the rear side (i.e., the state of the first discharge hole 8b as viewed from the rear side).
The first opening/closing member 80 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The first opening/closing member 80 is configured to include a main body portion 81, an opening/closing piece portion 82, and a connecting portion 83.
The main body 81 is formed in a plate shape extending along the left-right direction. The main body 81 is provided with two guide holes 81a aligned along the left-right direction. Each guide hole 81a is a through hole penetrating along the depth direction. Each guide hole 81a is provided to have a predetermined length along the left-right direction. In addition, a mechanical end 8c corresponding to each guide hole 81a is provided on the rear surface of the upper receiving tray 8. Each mechanical end 8c is formed in a cylindrical shape and is provided so as to protrude from the rear surface of the upper receiving tray 8 toward the rear side. Then, the mechanical end 8c corresponding to the guide hole 81a is inserted into each guide hole 81a.
The opening/closing piece 82 is formed in a rod shape extending along the left-right direction. The opening/closing piece 82 is provided so as to protrude rightward from the right end of the main body 81.
The connecting portion 83 is provided so as to protrude leftward from the left end of the main body portion 81. The connecting portion 83 is provided with a connecting hole 83a. The connecting hole 83a is a through hole that penetrates along the depth direction. The connecting hole 83a is provided so as to have a predetermined length along the up-down direction. An output shaft 88d, which will be described later, is inserted into the connecting hole 83a.

The first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at a position to the left of the first discharge hole 8b when viewed from the rear side. The first opening/closing member 80 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from a closed position (see FIG. 57) to a maximum open position (see FIG. 59).
When the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed in the closed position, the first discharge hole 8b is closed by the opening/closing piece portion 82, and it is not possible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b.
When the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left (maximum open position), the closure of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is gradually released, and the first discharge hole 8b is gradually opened. At this time, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 58), the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire first discharge hole 8b is opened.
That is, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the right (closed position side) of the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the left (maximum open position side) of the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by positioning the first opening/closing member 80 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass (discharge).

A first ball removal button 85 is provided on the side of the upper tray 8. The first ball removal button 85 includes an operating portion 85a and a pushing piece portion 85b.
The operating portion 85a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The pushing piece 85b is formed in a rod shape. The pushing piece 85b is fixed to the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a. In this case, the pushing piece 85b is provided so as to extend downward from the bottom surface of the operating portion 85a.
The first ball removal button 85 is disposed so that the operating portion 85a protrudes upward from the top surface of the tray unit SU. The first ball removal button 85 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the first ball removal button 85 is provided so that it can be displaced in the up-down direction. The player can displace the first ball removal button 85 in the upward direction by pushing the operating portion 85a downward. In particular, the player can displace the lower end of the pushing piece portion 85b downward by pushing the operating portion 85a downward.
The first ball removal button 85 can be displaced (pushed in) in the vertical direction within a range from the initial position (see Figure 57) to the lowest position (see Figure 59).

The first ball removal button 85 is connected to the first opening/closing member 80 via a bell crank (direction changing mechanism) 88. This makes it possible to convert the displacement of the first ball removal button 85 along the up-down direction into the displacement of the first opening/closing member 80 along the left-right direction.
The bell crank 88 includes an input crank arm 88a, an output crank arm 88b, and a rotating shaft 88c. Each of the crank arms 88a, 88b is formed in a rod shape. The bell crank 88 is configured by connecting the input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b in a generally V-shape (boomerang shape). The input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b are connected at a predetermined angle (for example, 90°). In the bell crank 88, the rotating shaft 88c is provided at the connection portion of the input crank arm 88a and the output crank arm 88b.
In particular, in the bell crank 88, the length of the output side crank arm 88b is longer than the length of the input side crank arm 88a, which makes it possible to increase the ratio of the displacement amount (movement amount) of the first opening/closing member 80 to the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85.

The rotation shaft 88c is disposed so as to extend along the depth direction, and the bell crank 88 is configured to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 88c.
The input crank arm 88a is disposed so as to extend generally in the left-right direction, so that as the bell clamp 88 rotates, the position of the tip of the input clamp arm 88a is displaced in the up-down direction.
The output side crank arm 88b is disposed so as to extend substantially in the up-down direction. As a result, the position of the tip of the output side clamp arm 88b is displaced in the left-right direction in response to the rotation of the bell clamp 88. An output shaft 88d is provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b. The output shaft 88d is disposed so as to extend in the depth direction.

The lower end of the pushing piece 85b is disposed so as to contact the upper surface of the tip of the input side clamp arm 88a. Also, an output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b is inserted into a connecting hole 83a provided at the left end of the first opening/closing member 80. Furthermore, the first opening/closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) by a coil spring sp when viewed from the rear side.
As a result, when the operating portion 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the closed position and the first ball removal button 85 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are not discharged.
In detail, when the operation part 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the coil spring sp biases the first opening and closing member 80 toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side, and the left inner surface of each guide hole 81a contacts the mechanical end 8c. As a result, each mechanical end 8c restricts (prevents) the displacement (displacement toward the right side) of the first opening and closing member 80, and the position of the first opening and closing member 80 is maintained in the closed position. Also, as the first opening and closing member 80 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) as viewed from the rear side, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b is pulled toward the right side, the bell crank 88 rotates counterclockwise, and the tip of the input side crank arm 88a pushes the pushing piece part 85b upward. As a result, the first ball removal button 85 is positioned in the initial position.

When the operating portion 85a is pressed downward from the state where the first ball removal button 85 is located in the initial position, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position side) as viewed from the back side. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (amount of pressing) of the operating portion 85a, the greater the amount of displacement of the first opening/closing member 80, and as a result, the greater the amount of opening (opening width) of the first discharge hole 8b.
In detail, when the operating portion 85a is pushed downward from the state where the first ball removal button 85 is disposed in the initial position, the lower end of the pushing piece portion 85b pushes down the tip of the input side crank arm 88a. As a result, when viewed from the rear side, the bell crank 88 rotates clockwise, the tip of the output side crank arm 88b moves toward the left side, and the output shaft 88d provided at the tip of the output side crank arm 88b pulls the first opening/closing member 80 toward the left side (maximum open position side). As a result, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position side), and the closure of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece portion 82 is released.
Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, the game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. Here, in the following description, the position of the first ball removal button 85 when the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at the minimum open position is referred to as the "specific position." In other words, when the first ball removal button 85 is disposed at the specific position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed at the minimum open position, the game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b.
As a result, when the first ball removal button 85 is located above the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when the first ball removal button 85 is located below the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the first ball removal button 85 at the specific position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (be discharged).

Furthermore, when the first ball removal button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the maximum open position. That is, when the first ball removal button 85 is pushed to the lowest position, the right inner surface of each guide hole 81a comes into contact with the mechanical end 8c when viewed from the rear side. As a result, each mechanical end 8c restricts (prevents) the displacement (displacement to the left) of the first opening/closing member 80, and the displacement (displacement to the left) of the first opening/closing member 80 is controlled to the maximum closed position, and accordingly, the displacement (displacement downward) of the first ball removal button 85 is limited to the lowest position.
Then, when the first ball removal button 85 is positioned at the lowest position and the operating portion 85a is stopped being pressed, the first opening/closing member 80 is returned to the closed position due to the deactivation of the coil spring sp, and the first ball removal button 85 is returned to its initial position.
As a result of the above, a player can discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 from the first discharge hole 8b to the lower tray 9 by pressing the first ball removal button 85 (operation portion 85a).

The lower tray 9 is formed in a dish shape with an open top. The bottom surface of the lower tray 9 extends along the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the lower tray 9 is inclined so that the left side is higher and the right side is lower when viewed from the front side. As a result, the game balls that flow into the lower tray 9 flow down the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 from the left side to the right side. In the following description, when viewed from the front side, the left side of the lower tray 9 is the "upstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down, and the right side of the lower tray 9 is the "downstream side" of the path along which the game balls flow down. That is, the game balls that flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a described later flow down the bottom surface of the lower tray 9 from the upstream side to the downstream side.
A second dispensing hole 9a is provided in the wall surface on the rear side of the lower receiving tray 9. In addition, a second discharge hole 9b is provided in the bottom surface of the lower receiving tray 9.
The second payout hole 9a is provided at the upstream end of the lower tray 9 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 (when the upper tray 8 is full) and the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b flow into the lower tray 9 from the second payout hole 9a.
The second discharge hole 9b is provided at the downstream end of the lower tray 9 (the downstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the lower tray 9 can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the lower tray 9. In this embodiment, the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to a coin box placed below the lower tray 9). The game balls stored in the lower tray 9 may be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, to a counting device that counts the game balls).
In particular, the dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. This allows the second discharge hole 9b to pass more game balls simultaneously than the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the number of game balls that can pass through the second discharge hole 9b simultaneously is greater than the number of game balls that can pass through the first discharge hole 8b simultaneously. Specifically, the second discharge hole 9b is configured with dimensions that allow two or more balls (five balls in this embodiment) to pass (discharge) simultaneously. In this embodiment, the inner diameter of the second discharge hole 9b is 25 mm.

As shown in Figures 60 to 62, a second opening/closing member 90 capable of opening and closing the second discharge hole 9b is provided on the bottom side of the lower tray 9. Here, Figures 60 to 62 show the state of the lower tray 9 as viewed from the bottom (i.e., the state of the second discharge hole 8b as viewed from the bottom (bottom) side).
The second opening/closing member 90 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The second opening/closing member 90 is configured to include an opening/closing plate portion 91 formed in a disk shape. The second opening/closing member 90 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from a closed position (see FIG. 60) to a maximum open position (see FIG. 62).
When the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed in the closed position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is closed by the opening/closing plate portion 91, making it impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b.
When the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the maximum open position, the closing of the second discharge hole 9b by the opening/closing plate portion 91 is gradually released, and the second discharge hole 9b is gradually opened. At this time, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 61), the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) the game balls one by one from the second discharge hole 9b. Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is opened. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
That is, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the closed position than the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the maximum open position than the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by disposing the second opening/closing member 90 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass through (be discharged).

A second ball removal button 95 is provided on the front side of the lower tray 9. The second ball removal button 95 includes an operating portion 95a formed in a piece shape.
The second ball removal button 95 is positioned so that the operating portion 95a protrudes from the front of the lower tray 9 toward the front side. The second ball removal button 95 can be operated by the player. Specifically, the second ball removal button 95 is provided so that it can be displaced along the depth direction. The player can displace the second ball removal button 95 along the depth direction by pushing the operating portion 95a toward the back side.
The second ball removal button 95 can be displaced (pushed in) in the depth direction within a range from the initial position (see Figure 60) to the lowest position (see Figure 62).

The second ball removal button 95 is connected to the second opening/closing member 90 via a change-direction mechanism (not shown). This makes it possible to convert the displacement of the second ball removal button 95 along the depth direction into the displacement of the second opening/closing member 90 along the left-right direction.
The second opening/closing member 90 is biased toward the right side (closed position side) when viewed from below by a biasing means such as a coil spring (not shown). As a result, when the operating portion 95a of the second ball removal button 95 is not operated, the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, it is impossible for the game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are not discharged.
When the second ball removal button 95 is in the initial position and the operating portion 95a is pushed in toward the back side, the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position) as viewed from below. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (push amount) of the operating portion 95a, the greater the amount of displacement of the second opening/closing member 90, and as a result, the greater the opening amount (opening width) of the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, the game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b. Here, in the following description, the position of the second ball removal button 95 when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed at the minimum open position is referred to as the "specific position." In other words, when the second ball removal button 95 is disposed at the specific position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed at the minimum open position, the game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b.
As a result, when the second ball removal button 95 is located closer to the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second ball removal button 95 is located further back from the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the second ball removal button 95 at the specific position, the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (discharge) is secured as the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b.
Furthermore, when the second ball removal button 95 is pushed to the lowest position, the second opening/closing member 90 is positioned at the maximum open position, which opens the entire second discharge hole 9b and allows two or more balls (five balls in this embodiment) to be discharged simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second ball removal button 95 is positioned in the lowest position and the operating portion 95a is stopped being pressed, the disabling means is deactivated, causing the second opening/closing member 90 to return to the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 to return to its initial position.
As a result of the above, by pressing the second ball removal button 95 (operation section 95a), the player can discharge the game balls stored in the lower tray 9 through the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to a dollar box placed below the lower tray 9).

In particular, in this embodiment, the dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. That is, the second discharge hole 9b can simultaneously pass (discharge) more game balls than the first discharge hole 8b. This makes it possible to quickly release the full-tank error when an abnormal state occurs in which the trays (upper tray 8 and lower tray 9) are filled with game balls and the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 cannot be sent to the trays (hereinafter referred to as a "full-tank error").
In addition, in this embodiment, the first ball removal button 85 can be operated to a state where the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b) by an amount of operation that is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (approximately 11 mm).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operation amount of 4 mm can bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the specific position is 4 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed in the specific position by pressing it 4 mm from the initial position.
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the upper tray 8 with a small amount of operation.
In addition, in this embodiment, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated with an amount of operation that is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball to put the game ball into a state where it can pass through the second discharge hole 9b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
In particular, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with a smaller operation amount than the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball in a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the operation amount (minimum operation amount) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the operation amount (minimum operation amount) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the second ball removal button 95, an operation amount of 3 mm can bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, for the second ball removal button 95, the operation amount for displacing it from the initial position to a specific position is 3 mm. In other words, for the second ball removal button 95, it is possible to place it in a specific position by pressing it 3 mm from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position" is less than the "operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position."
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the lower tray 9 with a small amount of operation. In particular, when a player is required to quickly remove balls from the tray, such as when a full-tank error occurs, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which enables efficient ball removal.

In this embodiment, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with a smaller operation load than the operation load of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball in a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the operation load (minimum operation load) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the operation load (minimum operation load) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operating load of 4 [N] can be applied to bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which a game ball can pass through (a state in which a game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operating load required to displace the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position is 4 [N]. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 located at the initial position can be placed at the specific position by pressing it with a force of 4 [N].
On the other hand, with regard to the second ball removal button 95, an operating load of 2 [N] can be applied to bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, the operating load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position is 2 [N]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95, which is located at the initial position, can be placed at a specific position by pressing it with a force of 2 [N]. In particular, the "operation load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position" is less than the "operation load required to displace the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position."
This allows the second ball removal button 95 to be operated with less force than the first ball removal button 85. This makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which allows efficient ball removal, when a full-tank error occurs or other situations require balls to be removed quickly from the tray.

In addition, in this embodiment, the maximum operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 is greater than the maximum operation amount of the first ball removal button 85. That is, the operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 required to open the second discharge hole 9b to the upper limit (maximum) is greater than the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 required to open the first discharge hole 8b to the upper limit (maximum).
That is, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is 6 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it in 6 mm from the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or greater than (exceeds) the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is 14.5 [mm]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it in 14.5 [mm] from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position" is greater than the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position."
As a result, of the two ball removal buttons (the first ball removal button 85 and the second ball removal button 95), the ball removal button with the largest maximum operation amount (the second ball removal button 95) becomes the ball removal button with the highest ball removal efficiency. Therefore, when a full-tank error occurs or other situations that require quick ball removal from the tray, the player can intuitively select ball removal using the second ball removal button 95.

The tray unit SU is also configured to include various operating means that can be operated by the player.
In this embodiment, various operating means include a performance button 5b, a rotary selector 5c, a light intensity adjustment button (not shown), a volume adjustment button (not shown), a cross key button (not shown), etc.
The effect button 5b includes an operation part that can be pressed by the player, and a button switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of the operation part. The button switch 25 outputs a detection signal to the effect control board 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the operation part is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") includes an operating section that can be rotated by the player, and a dial switch 26 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation of the operating section. The dial switch 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the operating section is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

The light intensity adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a light intensity adjustment switch 27 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The light intensity adjustment switch 27 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the second operation part is pressed.
The volume adjustment button includes two operation parts (a first operation part and a second operation part) that can be pressed by the player, and a volume adjustment switch 28 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The volume adjustment switch 28 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the first operation part is pressed, and outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the second operation part is pressed.
The cross key button includes four operation parts (up button, down button, left button, and right button) that can be pressed by the player, and a cross key switch 29 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of each operation part. The cross key switch 29 outputs a first detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the up button is pressed, outputs a second detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the down button is pressed, outputs a third detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the left button is pressed, and outputs a fourth detection signal to the performance control board 300 each time the right button is pressed.

Further, a loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit SU. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicatively connected to a CR unit 700 that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit 700, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 700 is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the ball loan button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit 700, a predetermined number of game balls are dispensed into the upper tray 8. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls dispensed, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining points of valuable media is inserted in the CR unit 700, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit 700.
Here, the prepaid card may be, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.

(Execution of effects according to the type of decorative unit DU and saucer unit SU)
Next, the execution of effects according to the types of decorative units DU and receiver units SU attached to the gaming machine body will be described.
In this embodiment, among the components of the pachinko machine 1, the gaming machine main body (the outer frame unit 2, the main frame unit (the inner frame unit 3 and the front frame unit 4), etc.) are commonly used for multiple different models.
On the other hand, among the components of the pachinko machine 1, the game board unit 10, the decoration unit DU, the receiving tray unit SU, etc., which are attached to the game machine body, are prepared separately for a plurality of models (different models). In other words, the game board unit 10, the decoration unit DU, the receiving tray unit SU, etc. are used exclusively for each model.
For example, when "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D" are manufactured as models (types) of pachinko machine 1, the gaming machine body can be commonly used for "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D."
On the other hand, the game board unit 10, the decorative unit DU, the tray unit SU, etc. are prepared in correspondence with each of the "Model A", "Model B", "Model C" and "Model D".
That is, as game board units 10, a "game board unit A" corresponding to "model A," a "game board unit B" corresponding to "model B," a "game board unit C" corresponding to "model C," and a "game board unit D" corresponding to "model D" are prepared.
In addition, decorative units DU are provided in the form of a "decorative unit A" corresponding to "model A," a "decorative unit B" corresponding to "model B," a "decorative unit C" corresponding to "model C," and a "decorative unit D" corresponding to "model D."
In addition, as the tray units SU, a "tray unit A" corresponding to "model A", a "tray unit B" corresponding to "model B", a "tray unit C" corresponding to "model C", and a "tray unit D" corresponding to "model D" are prepared.
In the pachinko machine 1 corresponding to "Model A," a "game board unit A," a "decorative unit A," and a "receiving tray unit A" are attached to the game machine main body common to "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D."
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 corresponding to "Model B," a "game board unit B," a "decorative unit B," and a "receiving tray unit B" are attached to the gaming machine main body common to "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D."
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 corresponding to "Model C," a "game board unit C," a "decorative unit C," and a "receiving tray unit C" are attached to the gaming machine main body common to "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D."
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 corresponding to "Model D," a "game board unit D," a "decorative unit D," and a "receiving tray unit D" are attached to the gaming machine main body common to "Model A,""ModelB,""ModelC," and "Model D."
At least one type of game board unit 10 may be configured to be used in common with a plurality of machines. At least one type of decoration unit DU may be configured to be used in common with a plurality of machines. At least one type of tray unit SU may be configured to be used in common with a plurality of machines.
For example, in addition to the above models, a "model E" may be set, and in the pachinko machine 1 corresponding to "model E," a "game board unit A" common to "model A," a "decorative unit B" common to "model B," and a "receiving tray unit C" common to "model C" may be attached to a gaming machine main body common to "model A,""modelB,""modelC," and "model D."

In particular, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to include a detection means for detecting the type of decorative unit DU attached to the gaming machine main body (specifically, the front frame unit 4), and a detection means for detecting the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the gaming machine main body (specifically, the front frame unit 4).
The mode of the predetermined performance is changed according to the type of the decorative unit DU detected by the detection means. That is, the mode of the predetermined performance is set to a mode corresponding to the type of the decorative unit DU detected by the detection means.
In addition, the configuration is such that the mode of the predetermined performance changes according to the type of the receiving tray unit SU detected by the detection means. In other words, the configuration is such that the mode of the predetermined performance is set to a mode corresponding to the type of the receiving tray unit SU detected by the detection means.
In this embodiment, the form of the "specific super reach variation presentation" (specifically, the form of the "specific development reach presentation image") described later changes depending on the type of the decorative unit DU detected by the detection means. That is, the form of the "specific super reach variation presentation" (specifically, the form of the "specific development reach presentation image") is set to a form corresponding to the type of the decorative unit DU detected by the detection means.
In addition, the state of the "button preview performance" (specifically, the state of the "button preview performance image") described later changes depending on the type of the receiving tray unit SU detected by the detection means. That is, the state of the "button preview performance" (specifically, the state of the "button preview performance image") is set to a state corresponding to the type of the receiving tray unit SU detected by the detection means.

Specifically, the front frame unit 4 is configured to include a decorative unit detection switch 35 and a tray unit detection switch 36.
The decorative unit detection switch 35 is configured to include four switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd. Each switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd of the system is configured to include a contact section. When the contact section of each switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd of the system is in the on state (conductive state), the switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 (the detection signal input from the switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd to the performance control board 300 is set to a high level). On the other hand, when the contact section of each switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd of the system is in the off state (non-conductive state), the switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 (the detection signal input from the switch circuit section sa, sb, sc, and sd to the performance control board 300 is set to a low level).
The decorative unit DU is configured to include a conductive piece portion that, when the decorative unit DU is attached to the front frame unit 4, can switch the contact portions of the switch circuit portions sa, sb, sc, and sd to an on state or an off state.
In particular, the configuration of the conductive piece (in this embodiment, the position where the conductive piece is provided) differs between "decorative unit A,""decorative unit B,""decorative unit C," and "decorative unit D." As a result, when the decorative unit DU is attached to the front frame unit 4, the pattern (combination) in which the contact parts of the four switch circuit parts sa, sb, sc, and sd are in the on or off state differs for each type of decorative unit DU.

Specifically, when the decorative unit DU is not attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact portions of all switch circuit portions sa, sb, sc, and sd are in the off state (non-conductive state).
In the "decorative unit A," a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit section sa among the four switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd. As a result, when the "decorative unit A" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact section of the switch circuit section sa among the four switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd is turned on (conductive), and the contact sections of the other switch circuit sections sb, sc, and sd are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in "decorative unit B", a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to switch circuit unit sb among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd. As a result, when "decorative unit B" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact unit for switch circuit unit sb among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd is turned on (conductive), and the contact units for the other switch circuit units sa, sc, and sd are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in the "decorative unit C", a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit section sc among the four switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd. As a result, when the "decorative unit C" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact section of the switch circuit section sc among the four switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd is turned on (conductive), and the contact sections of the other switch circuit sections sa, sb, and sd are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in "decorative unit D", a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to switch circuit unit sd among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd. As a result, when "decorative unit D" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact unit for switch circuit unit sd among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd is turned on (conductive), and the contact units for the other switch circuit units sa, sb, and sc are turned off (non-conductive).
It is also possible to provide a "decorative unit E" in which conductive pieces are provided at positions corresponding to the switch circuit units sa and sb among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd. As a result, when the "decorative unit E" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact units for the switch circuit units sa and sb among the four switch circuit units sa, sb, sc, and sd are turned on (conductive), and the contact units for the other switch circuit units sc and sd are turned off (non-conductive).

The performance control board 300 is provided with input ports (not shown) corresponding to the switch circuit sections sa, sb, sc, and sd of each system, and receiving memory areas corresponding to each input port.
The detection signal output by each of the switch circuits sa, sb, sc, and sd is input to the input port corresponding to the switch circuit sa, sb, sc, and sd. In each reception memory area, 1-bit data is set that indicates the input state of the detection signal to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area. That is, when a detection signal is input to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area (the input detection signal is at a high level), "1" is set to each reception memory area, and when a detection signal is not input to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area (the input detection signal is at a low level), "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input ports include an input port pa corresponding to the switch circuit unit sa, an input port pb corresponding to the switch circuit unit sb, an input port pc corresponding to the switch circuit unit sc, and an input port pd corresponding to the switch circuit unit sd.
In addition, there are provided, as receiving memory areas, a receiving memory area ma corresponding to input port pa (switch circuit section sa), a receiving memory area mb corresponding to input port pb (switch circuit section sb), a receiving memory area mc corresponding to input port pc (switch circuit section sc), and a receiving memory area md corresponding to input port pd (switch circuit section sd).
When the contact portion of the switch circuit section sa is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area ma, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sa is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area ma.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sb is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area mb, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sb is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area mb.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sc is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area mc, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sc is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area mc.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sd is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area md, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sd is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area md.

This enables the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 to determine (distinguish/identify) whether or not a decorative unit DU is attached to the front frame unit 4 and the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 based on the 4-bit data stored in the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md.
In other words, if "0" is stored in all receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, it is determined that the decorative unit DU is not attached to the front frame unit 4 (that the attachment of the decorative unit DU to the front frame unit 4 is incomplete).
On the other hand, if "1" is set in the receiving memory area ma among the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas mb, mc, and md, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A."
On the other hand, if "1" is set in receiving memory area mb among the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas ma, mc, and md, it is determined that the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B."
On the other hand, if "1" is set in receiving memory area mc among the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas ma, mb, and md, it is determined that the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit C."
On the other hand, if "1" is set in receiving memory area md among the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas ma, mb, and mc, it is determined that the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit D."
In addition, when the above-mentioned "decorative unit E" is provided, if "1" is set in the receiving memory area ma, mb, mc, and md among the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas mc, md, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit E."

A first material replacement offset memory area is provided in the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. A first material replacement offset value (any value from "0" to "3") is stored (set) in the first material replacement offset memory area.
In the material replacement offset setting process (step S28-2) executed when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires four bits of data (hereinafter referred to as "first model determination bit data") stored in the four receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md, determines the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 based on the acquired first model determination bit data, and stores the first material replacement offset value corresponding to the determined type of decorative unit DU in the first material replacement offset memory area.
In this case, if it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A", "0" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, if it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B", "1" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, if it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit C", "2" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, and if it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit D", "3" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area.

In addition, CGROM 303 stores, as image data (compressed image data) of the "specific development reach performance images", "specific development reach performance image data A" corresponding to "decorative unit A", "specific development reach performance image data B" corresponding to "decorative unit B", "specific development reach performance image data C" corresponding to "decorative unit C", and "specific development reach performance image data D" corresponding to "decorative unit D".
Here, the shapes (appearance, configuration, type) of the speakers 22 are different between "decorative unit A,""decorative unit B,""decorative unit C," and "decorative unit D." The image data of the "specific development reach performance image" corresponding to each type of decorative unit DU is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the shape of the speaker 22 provided in the decorative unit DU of that type.
That is, the "specific development reach performance image data A" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit A". Also, the "specific development reach performance image data B" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit B". Also, the "specific development reach performance image data C" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit C". Also, the "specific development reach performance image data D" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit D".
It is also acceptable for the shape (appearance) of the movable body unit to be different in "decorative unit A", "decorative unit B", "decorative unit C" and "decorative unit D". It is also acceptable for the "specific development reach performance image data A" to be configured to include a display of an image imitating the movable body unit provided in "decorative unit A", the "specific development reach performance image data B" to be configured to include a display of an image imitating the movable body unit provided in "decorative unit B", the "specific development reach performance image data C" to be configured to include a display of an image imitating the movable body unit provided in "decorative unit C", and the "specific development reach performance image data D" to be configured to include a display of an image imitating the movable body unit provided in "decorative unit D".

When executing a "specific super reach variation performance", the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires a first material replacement offset value stored in a first material replacement offset storage area. Then, image data corresponding to the acquired first material replacement offset value is set as image data for a "specific development reach performance image".
In this case, if "0" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data A" is set, if "1" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data B" is set, if "2" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data C" is set, and if "3" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data D" is set.
This causes a pattern of the "specific super reach variation presentation" (specifically, a pattern of the "specific development reach presentation image") to be set to a pattern corresponding to the type of decorative unit DU detected by the detection means.
In other words, when the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data A" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data B" is displayed as the "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit C", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data C" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit D", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data D" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".

As a result of the above, in the pachinko machine 1, the appearance of the ``specific super reach variation presentation'' (specifically, the appearance of the ``specific development reach presentation image'') is automatically changed depending on the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4.
This eliminates the need to replace the image data stored in the CGROM 303 depending on the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4, and also eliminates the need to change the control content.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of manufacturing steps and to prevent defects caused by human error.

Similarly, the receiving tray unit detection switch 36 is configured to include four switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh. The switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh of each system are configured to include a contact section. Then, when the contact section of each switch circuit section se, sf, sg, and sh is in the on state (conductive state), the switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh of each system output a detection signal to the performance control board 300 (the detection signal input from the switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh to the performance control board 300 is set to a high level). On the other hand, when the contact section of each switch circuit section se, sf, sg, and sh of each system is in the off state (non-conductive state), the switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh of each system stop outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 (the detection signal input from the switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh to the performance control board 300 is set to a low level).
The receiving tray unit SU includes a conductive piece that can switch the contacts of the switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh between an on state and an off state when the receiving tray unit SU is attached to the front frame unit 4.
In particular, the configuration of the conductive piece (in this embodiment, the position where the conductive piece is provided) is different between "Tray Unit A,""Tray Unit B,""Tray Unit C," and "Tray Unit D." As a result, when the tray unit SU is attached to the front frame unit 4, the pattern (combination) in which the contact parts of the four switch circuit parts se, sf, sg, and sh are in the on or off state is configured differently for each type of tray unit SU.

Specifically, when the receiving tray unit SU is not attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact portions of all the switch circuit portions se, sf, sg, and sh are in the OFF state (non-conductive state).
In the "receiving tray unit A," a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit section se among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh. As a result, when the "receiving tray unit A" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact section of the switch circuit section se among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh is turned on (conductive), and the contact sections of the other switch circuits sf, sg, and sh are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in the "receiving tray unit B", a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit section sf among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh. As a result, when the "receiving tray unit B" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact section of the switch circuit section sf among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh is turned on (conductive), and the contact sections of the other switch circuits se, sg, and sh are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in the "receiving tray unit C," a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit unit sg among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh. As a result, when the "receiving tray unit C" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact unit of the switch circuit unit sg among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh is turned on (conductive), and the contact units of the other switch circuits se, sf, and sh are turned off (non-conductive).
On the other hand, in the "receiving tray unit D", a conductive piece is provided at a position corresponding to the switch circuit section sh among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh. As a result, when the "receiving tray unit D" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact section of the switch circuit section sh among the four switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh is turned on (conductive), and the contact sections of the other switch circuits se, sf, and sg are turned off (non-conductive).
It is also possible to provide a "receiving tray unit E" in which conductive pieces are provided at positions corresponding to the switch circuit units se and sf among the four switch circuit units se, sf, sg, and sh. As a result, when the "receiving tray unit E" is attached to the front frame unit 4, the contact units of the switch circuit units se and sf among the four switch circuit units se, sf, sg, and sg are turned on (conductive), and the contact units of the other switch circuit units sg and sh are turned off (non-conductive).

The performance control board 300 is provided with input ports (not shown) corresponding to the switch circuit sections se, sf, sg, and sh of each system, and receiving memory areas corresponding to each input port.
The detection signal output by each of the switch circuits se, sf, sg, and sh is input to the input port corresponding to the switch circuit se, sf, sg, and sh. In each reception memory area, 1-bit data is set that indicates the input state of the detection signal to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area. That is, when a detection signal is input to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area (the input detection signal is at a high level), "1" is set to each reception memory area, and when a detection signal is not input to the input port corresponding to the reception memory area (the input detection signal is at a low level), "0" is set.
In this embodiment, the input ports include an input port pe corresponding to the switch circuit unit se, an input port pf corresponding to the switch circuit unit sf, an input port pg corresponding to the switch circuit unit sg, and an input port ph corresponding to the switch circuit unit sh.
In addition, there are provided, as receiving memory areas, a receiving memory area me corresponding to the input port pe (switch circuit section se), a receiving memory area mf corresponding to the input port pf (switch circuit section sf), a receiving memory area mg corresponding to the input port pg (switch circuit section sg), and a receiving memory area mh corresponding to the input port ph (switch circuit section sh).
When the contact portion of the switch circuit section se is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area me, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section se is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area me.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sf is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area mf, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sf is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area mf.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sg is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area mg, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sg is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area mg.
In addition, when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sh is in the off state (non-conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a low level), a "0" is set in the receiving memory area mh, and when the contact portion of the switch circuit section sh is in the on state (conductive state) (when the detection signal is at a high level), a "1" is set in the receiving memory area mh.

This enables the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 to determine (distinguish/identify) whether or not a receiving tray unit SU is attached to the front frame unit 4 and the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 based on the 4-bit data stored in the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh.
In other words, if "0" is stored in all receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, it is determined that the receiving tray unit SU is not attached to the front frame unit 4 (the receiving tray unit SU is not completely attached to the front frame unit 4).
On the other hand, if, among the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, "1" is set in the receiving memory area me and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas mf, mg, and mh, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A."
On the other hand, if, among the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, "1" is set in receiving memory area mf and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas me, mg, and mh, it is determined that the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B."
On the other hand, if, among the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, "1" is set in the receiving memory area mg and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas me, mf, and mh, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit C."
On the other hand, if, among the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, "1" is set in receiving memory area mh and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas me, mf, and mg, it is determined that the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D."
In addition, when the above-mentioned "receiving tray unit E" is provided, if "1" is set in the receiving memory areas me and mf among the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, and "0" is set in the other receiving memory areas mg and mh, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit E."

A second material replacement offset memory area is provided in the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. A second material replacement offset value (any value from "0" to "3") is stored (set) in the second material replacement offset memory area.
In the material replacement offset setting process (step S28-2) executed when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires four bits of data (hereinafter referred to as "second model determination bit data") stored in the four receiving memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh, determines the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 based on the acquired second model determination bit data, and stores the second material replacement offset value corresponding to the determined type of receiving tray unit SU in the second material replacement offset memory area.
In this case, if it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A,""0" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, if it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B,""1" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, if it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit C,""2" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, and if it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D,""3" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area.

In addition, CGROM 303 stores, as image data (compressed image data) for the "button preview performance images", "button preview performance image data A" corresponding to "receiving tray unit A", "button preview performance image data B" corresponding to "receiving tray unit B", "button preview performance image data C" corresponding to "receiving tray unit C", and "button preview performance image data D" corresponding to "receiving tray unit D".
Here, the shapes (appearance, configuration, type) of the operating means that can be operated by the player differ between "receiving tray unit A,""receiving tray unit B,""receiving tray unit C," and "receiving tray unit D." The image data of the "button preview image" corresponding to each type of receiving tray unit SU is configured to include the display of an image that imitates the shape of the operating means provided on that type of receiving tray unit SU.
That is, the "button preview performance image data A" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., performance button 5b) provided on the "receiving tray unit A". Also, the "button preview performance image data B" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., an operating lever) provided on the "receiving tray unit B". Also, the "button preview performance image data C" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., a trigger of an object that imitates a gun) provided on the "receiving tray unit C". Also, the "button preview performance image data D" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., an object that can be pressed) provided on the "receiving tray unit D".

When executing the "button advance notice performance", the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires the second material replacement offset value stored in the second material replacement offset storage area. Then, image data corresponding to the acquired second material replacement offset value is set as image data for the "button advance notice performance image".
In this case, if "0" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data A" is set, if "1" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data B" is set, if "2" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data C" is set, and if "3" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data D" is set.
This sets the mode of the "button preview performance" (specifically, the mode of the "button preview performance image") to a mode corresponding to the type of receiver unit SU detected by the detection means.
In other words, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A", an image based on "button preview performance image data A" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B", an image based on "button preview performance image data B" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit C", an image based on "button preview performance image data C" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D", an image based on "button preview performance image data D" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".

As a result of the above, in the pachinko machine 1, the form of the ``button preview performance'' (specifically, the form of the ``button preview performance image'') is automatically changed depending on the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4.
This eliminates the need to replace the image data stored in the CGROM 303 according to the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4, and also eliminates the need to change the control contents.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of manufacturing steps and to prevent defects caused by human error.

(Configuration of launch handle unit 6)
Next, the configuration of the launch handle unit 6 will be described.
Figure 63 is an enlarged view of the firing handle unit. Figure 64 is a perspective view of the firing handle unit with the face cover removed.
Here, FIG. 63(a) shows a state in which an operating ring 72, which will be described later, is located at an initial position, and FIG. 63(b) shows a state in which the operating ring 72 is located at a maximum position.
The firing handle unit 6 is provided on the main body frame. Specifically, the firing handle unit 6 is provided so as to protrude from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. The firing handle unit 6 is disposed to the side of the receiving tray unit SU.
As shown in FIGS. 63 and 64 , the firing handle unit 6 includes a handle base 71 , an operating ring 72 , a coil spring 73 , a face cover 74 , and a firing stop button 77 .

The handle base 71 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape and is fixed to the front surface of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). The handle base 71 is provided with a rotating shaft 71a and three guide shafts 71b. The rotating shaft 71a is provided along the central axis of the handle base 71, which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The three guide shafts 71b are provided around the rotating shaft 71a.
The operation ring 72 is rotatably attached to the handle base 71. The operation ring 72 includes a ring portion 72a and a plurality of finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc (three in this embodiment) provided on the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a.
The ring portion 72a is formed in a generally cylindrical shape (generally annular or ring-shaped) with an open top surface and a bottom surface.
Each of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc is provided so as to protrude outward from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are provided at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction of the ring portion 72a. The three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are different in size. In particular, the three finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are different in the amount of protrusion from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "protrusion amount"). In other words, the protrusion amount is the dimension (height) from the outer circumferential surface of the ring portion 72a to the apex (radial apex) of each of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc.

In this embodiment, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, fc lined up in the left-right direction when the operating ring 72 is placed in the initial position, the finger hook portion fa on the left side has the greatest protrusion amount, the finger hook portion fc on the right side has the smallest protrusion amount, and the finger hook portion fb in the middle has an amount of protrusion smaller than that of finger hook portion fa but larger than that of finger hook portion fc.
In other words, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, fc lined up in the vertical direction when the operating ring 72 is positioned at the maximum position, the finger hook portion fa located on the upper side has the greatest protrusion amount, the finger hook portion fc located on the lower side has the smallest protrusion amount, and the finger hook portion fb located in the middle has an amount of protrusion smaller than that of finger hook portion fa but larger than that of finger hook portion fc.
That is, the protrusion amounts of the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc are, in order from the largest protrusion amount, finger hook fa, finger hook fb, and finger hook fc (large protrusion amount → small protrusion amount).

A bearing hole (not shown) and a pair of guide holes 72b are provided in the bottom surface of the ring portion 72a. The bearing hole is provided along the central axis of the ring portion 72a, which is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. Each guide hole 72b is an elongated through hole curved in the circumferential direction. The pair of guide holes 72b are arranged around the bearing hole with a phase shift of 180 degrees.
One end of the coil spring 73 is engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the handle base 71, and the other end is engaged with a receiving portion (not shown) of the operation ring 72. The coil spring 73 biases the operation ring 72 toward the initial position.
The face cover 74 is formed in a substantially hemispherical shape. The face cover 74 is attached to the tip of each guide shaft 71b by screwing. As a result, the operation ring 72 is rotatably held in the area between the handle base 71 and the face cover 74. The face cover 74 covers (conceals) the top surface side of the open ring portion 72a.
The firing stop button 77 is provided on the outer circumferential surface of the handle base 71. The firing stop button 77 can be pressed by the player.

The operation ring 72 is attached to the handle base 71 with the rotating shaft 71a inserted into the bearing hole and the guide shaft 71b inserted into the guide hole 72b. This allows the operation ring 72 to rotate freely around the rotating shaft 71a relative to the handle base 71. At this time, the rotation range of the operation ring 72 is restricted by the guide shaft 71b inserted into the guide hole 72b.
That is, as described above, the operation ring 72 is always biased in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front side by the elastic force of the coil spring 73. Therefore, when the operation ring 72 is not rotated, one end face of each guide hole 72b contacts the guide shaft 71b. This restricts the rotation of the operation ring 72 in the counterclockwise direction, and the operation ring 72 is disposed (stationary) in the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation ring 72 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front side by rotating it against the biasing force (elastic force) of the coil spring 73. When the amount of clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72 reaches a predetermined amount, the other end face of each guide hole 72b comes into contact with the guide shaft 71b. This restricts the clockwise rotation of the operation ring 72, and the operation ring 72 is positioned (stationary) at the maximum position.
On the other hand, when the rotation of the operation ring 72 is completed (stopped), the bias (elastic force) of the coil spring 73 returns the operation ring 72 to its initial position.
As described above, the player can rotate the operation ring 72. At this time, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72 by placing his/her fingers on each of the finger rests fa, fb, and fc.
In particular, the operation ring 72 can be rotated (displaced and operated) within a range from an initial position (see FIG. 63(a)) to a maximum position (see FIG. 63(b)).
As described below, the game area 30 is configured with a left-side path (left-hand hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right-side path (right-hand hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow.
Then, the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 in response to the rotation of the operation ring 72 passes through a launch passage (not shown) and flows into the game area 30. At this time, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that has passed through the launch passage passes through a guide passage (not shown) and flows into the right path.

The firing handle unit 6 includes a firing volume 411 (see FIG. 3), a touch sensor 412 (see FIG. 3), and a firing stop switch 413 (see FIG. 3).
The firing volume 411 is composed of a variable resistor. The firing volume 411 detects the amount of rotation of the operation ring 72 (the angle at which the operation ring 72 is rotated). Specifically, the firing volume 411 includes a rotation shaft (not shown) and a resistor (not shown) whose resistance value changes depending on the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the rotation shaft. The rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is fixed coaxially to the bearing hole of the operation ring 72. As a result, the rotation shaft of the firing volume 411 is rotated depending on the rotation operation of the operation ring 72, and the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes depending on the amount of rotation of the operation ring 72.
The firing volume 411 is electrically connected to an operation detection unit 421 (see FIG. 4 ). The operation detection unit 421 detects the rotation operation (rotation operation amount) of the operation ring 72 based on a change in the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411.

The touch sensor 412 detects the touch (grasping) of the operation ring 72 by the player based on the change in capacitance. When the touch sensor 412 detects the touch of the player to the operation ring 72, it outputs a touch signal to the firing condition detection unit 422 (see FIG. 4) (the touch signal is at a high level). On the other hand, when the touch sensor 412 does not detect the touch of the player to the operation ring 72, it stops outputting the touch signal to the firing condition detection unit 422 (the touch signal is at a low level).
The firing stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the firing stop button 77. When the firing stop switch 413 does not detect the pressing of the firing stop button 77, it outputs a firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the firing stop signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the firing stop switch 413 detects the pressing of the firing stop button 77, it stops outputting the firing stop signal to the firing enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the firing stop signal to a low level).

(Positional relationship between the operation ring 72 and the main body frame)
Next, the positional relationship between the operation ring 72 and the main body frame will be described.
Fig. 65 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the front frame unit, and Fig. 66 is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the operation ring and the inner frame unit.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, as shown in Fig. 65, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, as shown in Fig. 66, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This ensures that even if the main body frame is placed on a floor or the like, the finger grips fa, fb, fc will not come into contact with the floor or the like, thereby preventing damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the main body frame. That is, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude downward from the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the main body frame. That is, as shown in Fig. 65, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, as shown in Fig. 66, when the operation ring 72 is disposed in the initial position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the main body frame. That is, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hooks fa, fb, and fc (tops) do not protrude to the right beyond the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operating ring 72) even if the main body frame is accidentally hit against a wall or the like, without causing the finger grip portions fa, fb, fc to come into contact with the wall or the like.
In particular, in this embodiment, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the main body frame. That is, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame). Also, even when the operation ring 72 is positioned (rotated) at any position within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, each finger hook portion fa, fb, fc (top) does not protrude to the right from the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).
This makes it possible to more reliably prevent damage to the launch handle unit 6 (operation ring 72).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, of the three finger hook portions fa, fb, and fc, the finger hook portion fa, which has the greatest protrusion amount, is configured not to be located at the lowest point in the rotational trajectory of the finger hook portion fa when the operating ring 72 is positioned at the maximum position.
Here, the "rotational trajectory of the finger grip portion fa" refers to the trajectory that the finger grip portion fa follows when the operation ring 72 rotates within a range from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the initial position, the finger hook fa is disposed at the lowest point of the rotation trajectory of the finger hook fa, and when the operation ring 72 is disposed at the maximum position, the finger hook fa is disposed at a position higher than the lowest point of the rotation trajectory of the finger hook fa.
This makes it easier for the player to place his/her finger on the finger grip portion fa, and as a result, the player can easily rotate the operation ring 72.

In detail, as shown in Fig. 65 and Fig. 66, the dimension (distance) D1 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fa is set to 53.4 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) D2 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fb is set to 45.6 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) D3 from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the apex of the finger hook portion fc is set to 39.3 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) E from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the edge (radial end) of the ring portion 72a is set to 34.6 [mm].
In particular, the dimension (distance) F from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 40.0 mm. Also, the dimension (distance) G from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) is set to 49.1 mm.
As a result, dimension D3<dimension F<dimension G, and the apex of finger hook portion fc does not protrude outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position. Also, dimension D2<dimension G, and the apex of finger hook portion fb does not protrude outward from the edge of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position.
Furthermore, the dimension (distance) H from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the lower edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 45.0 [mm]. Also, the dimension (distance) I from the rotation center (rotation shaft 71a) of the operation ring 72 to the right edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame) is set to 51.1 [mm].
As a result, dimension D3<dimension H<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fc does not protrude outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame). Also, dimension D2<dimension I, and when the operation ring 72 rotates within the range from the initial position to the maximum position, the apex of the finger hook portion fb does not protrude outward from the edge of the inner frame unit 3 (inner frame).

(Operation Torque of Operation Ring 72)
Next, the operating torque of the operating ring 72 will be described.
Fig. 67 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting an operation torque according to Example 1. Fig. 68 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting an operation torque according to Example 2.
In the following description, the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 to start rotating from the initial position is referred to as the "first operation torque." In other words, the first operation torque is the operation torque required for the operation ring 72 disposed at the initial position to start moving. Therefore, when the operation torque acting on the operation ring 72 disposed at the initial position (operation torque toward the maximum position) reaches the first operation torque, the operation ring 72 starts rotating toward the maximum position.
The operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position is referred to as the "second operation torque." In other words, the second operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 located at the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position. Therefore, when the second operation torque (operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 located at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position.
Here, the "left hit reference position" is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be launched to the left path, which will be described later. In particular, the left hit reference position is the position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be stably launched to the left path. In this embodiment, the center (central) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 where the game ball will be launched to the left path is specified as the left hit reference position.

Further, the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is referred to as the "third operation torque." In other words, the third operation torque is the operation torque required to displace the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position to the maximum position. Therefore, when the third operation torque (operation torque toward the maximum position) acts on the operation ring 72 arranged at the initial position, the operation ring 72 rotates from the initial position to the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the maximum rotation position and the right-hand hit reference position coincide with each other. The "right-hand hit reference position" is a position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be launched to the right-hand path described later. In particular, the right-hand hit reference position is a position of the operation ring 72 that allows the game ball to be stably launched to the right-hand path.
In addition, the maximum rotation position and the right-hit reference position may not coincide with each other. In other words, the right-hit reference position may be set to the center (center) position (angle) of the range (angle) of the operation ring 72 where the game ball is launched to the right path.

In the present embodiment, the second operating torque is greater than the first operating torque. Also, the third operating torque is greater than the second operating torque. In particular, the third operating torque is equal to or less than twice the second operating torque.
This reduces the difference between the second and third operation torques, and the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the left-hand hit reference position to the maximum position (right-hand hit reference position) does not increase suddenly compared to the operation torque when the operation ring 72 is rotated from the initial position to the left-hand hit reference position. Therefore, fatigue of the player caused by operating the operation ring 72 is suppressed, and the burden on the player can be reduced.
In the present embodiment, the second operating torque is equal to or less than twice the first operating torque.
This reduces the difference between the first and second operation torques, and prevents a sudden increase in the operation torque required to rotate the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-hit reference position, compared to the operation torque required to start moving the operation ring 72 from the initial position. This reduces the fatigue of the player caused by operating the operation ring 72, and reduces the burden on the player.

As shown in FIG. 67, in the first embodiment, the first operating torque is 6.8 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 13.6 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 23.8 [N·mm].
Also, as shown in FIG. 68, in the second embodiment, the first operating torque is 27.2 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 54.4 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 95.2 [N·mm].
On the other hand, in the comparative example, the first operating torque is 31.0 [N·mm], the second operating torque is 69.0 [N·mm], and the third operating torque is 152.0 [N·mm].
As a result, in Examples 1 and 2, compared to the comparative example, it is possible to make the operating torque curve (a curve showing the relationship between operating torque and position) flatter, and when rotating the operating ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position, there is no sudden increase in operating torque, making it possible to reduce the burden on the player.
In particular, in Example 1, compared to Example 2, the change in operating torque is smaller when rotating the operating ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position, making it possible to further reduce the burden on the player.

(Rotation angle of operation ring 72)
Next, the rotation angle of the operation ring 72 will be described.
In the following description, the operation angle (rotation angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the left-handed reference position is referred to as the "first operation angle." In other words, when the operation ring 72 located in the initial position is rotated by the first operation angle (rotation toward the maximum position), the operation ring 72 is located at the left-handed reference position.
The operation angle (rotation angle) of the operation ring 72 from the initial position to the maximum position is defined as a “second operation angle.” In other words, when the operation ring 72 located in the initial position is rotated by the second operation angle (rotation toward the maximum position), the operation ring 72 is located at the maximum position.
In this embodiment, the first operation angle is in the range of 45° to 60°, and the second operation angle is in the range of 100° to 120°. In particular, the first operation angle is equal to or less than half of the second operation angle.
This makes it easier for the player to launch the game ball towards the right-side path.

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
Fig. 2 shows the front of the game board unit, and is a diagram showing a part particularly necessary for explanation. Fig. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the game board. Fig. 70 is a diagram showing the configuration of the outer rail. Fig. 71 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail. Fig. 72 is a cross-sectional view of the rail base.
In Fig. 2, the rail base 13 and the like are omitted. Fig. 70(a) shows the outer rail 14 as viewed from the side, and Fig. 70(b) shows the outer rail 14 as viewed from the front. Fig. 71 shows the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 as viewed from the front. In Fig. 72, the game ball is indicated by the symbol "B".
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the rear side of the front frame unit 4. The player can view the game board 11 (play area 30) described later through the transparent plates g1 and g2. In this embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the rear side of the transparent plate g2 disposed on the rear side of the pair of transparent plates g1 and g2 and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub-image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.

The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate.
As shown in Fig. 69, the game board 11 is made of resin and formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown in Fig. 69) consisting of a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set board.
An inner rail 12, a rail base 13, and an outer rail 14 are attached to the front of the game board 11. A game area 30 is defined by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 14, etc.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. When viewed from the front side, the inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 forms an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 12b is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. The return ball prevention piece 12b prevents the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.

The rail base 13 is made of resin etc. As shown in Fig. 69, the rail base 13 is provided with a guide surface 13b that supports the outer rail 14. The guide surface 13b extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a portion of the guide surface 13b in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire longitudinal area of the guide surface 13b is inclined toward the rear side. This allows at least a portion (substantially the entire area in this embodiment) of the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b to be inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). This makes it difficult for the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 to flow toward the front side (the transparent plate g2 side), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate g2.
The guide surface 13b is provided with a plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr. Each protrusion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical convex portion and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 13b. Each protrusion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14, and determines the position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (game board 11).
A base end (starting end) of the rail base 13 is provided with a base end support portion (not shown) that supports the base end bent portion 14a provided on the outer rail 14. The base end support portion is configured as a recess into which the base end bent portion 14a can be inserted. In addition, a tip end support portion (not shown) that supports the tip end bent portion 14b provided on the outer rail 14 is provided at the tip end (terminal end) of the rail base 13. The tip end support portion is configured as a recess into which the tip end bent portion 14b can be inserted.
The rail base 13 is also provided with a covering portion 13a that covers (supports) the side surface (front side surface) of the outer rail 14 when viewed from the front side.

The outer rail 14 is made of metal. As shown in Figures 69 and 70, the outer rail 14 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 is provided with a base end bent portion 14a. The base end bent portion 14a is formed by bending the base end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially L-shape. A tip end bent portion 14b is provided at the tip end (terminal end) of the outer rail 14. The tip end bent portion 14b is formed by bending the tip end of the outer rail 14 into a substantially U-shape.
The outer circumferential surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape is supported by the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. The inner circumferential surface of the outer rail 14 formed in an arc shape constitutes an outer guide surface 14c that guides the game ball.
A plurality of guide holes gh are provided in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c). Each guide hole gh is a through hole that penetrates the outer rail 14 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protrusion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c), guide holes gh are provided at positions corresponding to the protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 13b when the outer rail 14 is supported (attached) on the guide surface 13b. As a result, the guide holes gh and the protrusions pr guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the rail base 13 (guide surface 13b), and further guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 14 relative to the game board 11.

Next, the arrangement of the guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) will be described.
Here, the arrangement of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b correspond to each other.
Therefore, the arrangement conditions of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14 and the arrangement conditions of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b are the same.
Therefore, the following describes the arrangement conditions of the multiple guide holes gh in the outer rail 14, and the description of the arrangement conditions of the multiple protrusions pr on the guide surface 13b is omitted.
The outer rail 14 is attached to the front surface of the game board 11 via the rail base 13. The outer rail 14 (outer guide surface 14c) extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side while attached to the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 71, in the following explanation, when looking at the outer rail 14 attached to the game board 11 from the front side, the uppermost part of the outer rail 14 (upper vertex) will be referred to as the "upper vertex P1", and the leftmost part of the outer rail 14 (left vertex) will be referred to as the "left vertex P2".
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the left vertex P2 is defined as the "first range H1," the range from the left vertex P2 to the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "second range H2," and the range from the upper vertex P1 of the outer rail 14 to the tip (end) of the outer rail 14 is defined as the "third range H3."
The range from the left apex P2 to the tip (end) of the outer rail 14 is defined as a "fourth range." That is, the fourth range = the second range H2 + the third range H3.
The range from the base end (starting end) of the outer rail 14 to the upper apex P1 is defined as a "fifth range." That is, the fifth range = the first range H1 + the second range H2.
The range from the base end (starting end) to the middle part of the outer rail 14 is referred to as a "sixth range," and the range from the middle part to the tip (ending end) of the outer rail 14 is referred to as a "seventh range." Here, the "middle part" refers to the middle (center) part of the outer rail 14 in the longitudinal direction.

In this embodiment, the first range H1 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the second range H2, and the second range H2 has a greater number of guide holes gh than the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In addition, in this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the second range H2, and the number of guide holes gh provided in the first range H1 is greater than or equal to the number of guide holes gh provided in the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the first area H1 is greater than that of the fourth area.
In this embodiment, the number of guide holes gh provided in the fifth range H3 is greater than that of the third range H3.
In this embodiment, the sixth area has a greater number of guide holes gh than the seventh area.

Specifically, the first region H1 has three guide holes gh arranged along the longitudinal direction, the second region H2 has two guide holes gh arranged along the longitudinal direction, and the third region H3 has no guide holes gh.
As a result, two guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fourth region, five guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the fifth region, four guide holes gh are provided along the longitudinal direction in the sixth region, and one guide hole gh is provided along the longitudinal direction in the seventh region.
In other words, on the outer rail 14, the portion on the base end side (the portion on the game ball launching device 430 side) receives a greater impact from the collision of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 than the portion on the tip end side (terminal end side), and the impact on the launch direction of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430 is greater.
As a result, the base end (the game ball launcher 430 side) of the outer rail 14 requires greater attachment strength and more accurate positioning than the tip end (terminal end) of the outer rail 14.
Therefore, in this embodiment, by increasing the number of guide holes gh provided in the base end side (game ball launching device 430 side) of the outer rail 14, it is possible to prevent positional deviation and vibration in the base end side. In addition, it is possible to stabilize the trajectory of the game ball and execute the game according to the design value. In particular, it is possible to prevent damage and vibration of the outer rail 14 due to the collision of the launched game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball deviation of the launched game ball due to the damage and vibration, and it is possible to stably send the launched game ball to the board surface of the game board 11. As a result, the irregular movement of the game ball is reduced, and it is possible to execute the game stably.
On the other hand, by reducing the number of guide holes gh provided at the tip (terminal) end of the outer rail 14, it is possible to facilitate processing of the outer rail 14 and attachment to the rail base 13.
As a result of the above, it is possible to prevent the outer rail 14 from shifting out of position or vibrating, while also facilitating the processing of the outer rail 14 and its attachment to the game board 11.

In particular, in this embodiment, the guide holes gh are not formed at the upper vertex P1 and the left vertex P2 of the outer rail 14.
That is, when an impact is applied to the top and bottom sides or the left and right sides of the game board 11, the impact is strongly transmitted to the upper apex P1 or the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14. As a result, if guide holes gh are formed at the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, the strength of the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 will be reduced due to the formation of the guide holes gh, and there is a risk that the outer rail 14 will be damaged when the above-mentioned impact is transmitted. Therefore, by forming the guide holes gh in a manner that avoids the upper apex P1 and the left apex P2 of the outer rail 14, it is possible to suppress damage to the outer rail 14.
In this embodiment, the guide hole gh is not formed in the third region H3. This makes it possible to easily process the outer rail 14 and attach it to the rail base 13. Note that one or more guide holes gh may be formed in the third region H3.

As described above, in this embodiment, five guide holes gh are formed in the outer rail 14 along the longitudinal direction. In this case, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are non-uniform. In particular, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are set so as to become wider toward the tip end side (terminal end side). In other words, the arrangement intervals of the five guide holes gh are set so as to become narrower toward the base end side (starting end side).
Each guide hole gh is formed at a position where it does not come into contact with the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430. That is, as shown in Fig. 72, each guide hole gh is formed at the end of the inner side (front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14. In particular, each guide hole gh is formed at a position on the inner side (front side of the game board 11) in the width direction of the outer rail 14, which is a position that is a radius of the game ball from the front side of the game board 11.

Next, a method for attaching each of the rails 12, 14 to the game board 11 will be described.
To attach the inner rail 12 to the game board 11, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the inner rail 12 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front side of the game board 11. This positions the inner rail 12 at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 11. The inner rail 12 is then fixed to the front side of the game board 11 by screws.
To attach the outer rail 14 to the game board 11, first, the rail base 13 is attached to the front of the game board 11. To do this, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the rail base 13 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front of the game board 11. This positions the rail base 13 at a predetermined position on the front of the game board 11. The rail base 13 is then fixed to the front of the game board 11 by screws.
Next, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13. For this, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 is arranged along the guide surface 13b of the rail base 13. In addition, the base end side bent portion 14a of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the base end side support portion of the rail base 13, and the tip end side bent portion 14b of the outer rail 14 is inserted (fitted) into the tip end side support portion of the rail base 13. Furthermore, each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 13b is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 14. As a result, the outer rail 14 is attached to the rail base 13 with substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 14 supported by the guide surface 13b.

In front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is defined by an inner rail 12, an outer rail 14, etc. In the game area 30, a left side path (left hitting area) formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right side path (right hitting area) formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths along which game balls flow.
In addition, the inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and the outer guide surface 14c of the outer rail 14 are arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance in front of the game board 11. A launch passage r1 that guides the game balls launched by the game ball launcher 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 14c.
In addition, a guide passage r2 that guides (guides) the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 to the right-side passage is formed in the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed above the main image display device 31. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
In this embodiment, the outer guide surface 14c constitutes the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2. A decorative portion 33 is provided above the opening in the front of the game board 11. An inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 is formed on the upper surface of the decorative portion 33.
A game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 passes through the launch passage r1 and flows into the game area 30. In this case, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 passes through the guide passage r2 and flows into the right path.

Here, the positional relationship between the design portion 40 and the guide passage r2 will be described.
Figure 73 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA shown in Figure 1. Figure 74 is an enlarged view of Figure 73. Note that in Figures 73 and 74, the game ball is indicated by the symbol "B".
As shown in Fig. 73, a design portion 40 is provided at the upper end of the front frame unit 4. When viewed from the front side, the design portion 40 is provided so as to surround the transparent plates g1 and g2. The design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) from the front side of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side. In particular, the design portion 40 is provided so as to bulge (protrude) toward the front side relative to the transparent plates g1 and g2.
Specifically, the design portion 40 is configured to include an upper surface 41 extending from the front of the front frame unit 4 (front frame) toward the front side, a front surface 42 extending downward from the front end (front end) of the upper surface 41, and a lower surface 43 extending toward the rear side from the lower end of the front surface 42. As a result, the cross section of the design portion 40 is configured to be approximately U-shaped.
The rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 extends to the front surface of the transparent plate g1. In this embodiment, the rear end of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 contacts the front surface of the transparent plate g1.
In particular, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is inclined in the depth direction so that the front side is lower and the rear side is higher. As a result, when viewed from the front side, the lower end of the design portion 40 covers (conceals) a part of the upper end of the game board 11.
Further, the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is curved so that each end in the left-right direction is lower and the center portion in the left-right direction is higher.

In the following description, as shown in Figures 73 and 74, a virtual line that is perpendicular to the front of the game board 11 and passes through the uppermost (vertex/top) portion of the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2 (hereinafter referred to as the "outer peripheral vertex") is defined as the "first reference line k1." Note that in this embodiment, the outer peripheral vertex coincides with the upper vertex P1.
A virtual line that extends vertically, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as a "first vertical line" (not shown). A portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the first vertical line is defined as a "first design portion d1."
A virtual line that extends vertically, intersects the first reference line k1, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the underside 43 of the design portion 40 is defined as a "second vertical line" (not shown). A portion of the underside 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the second vertical line is defined as a "second design portion d2."
In addition, a virtual line that is perpendicular to the front surface of the game board 11 and passes through a portion of the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2 that is located directly below the outer periphery apex is defined as a "second reference line k2." In other words, the second reference line k2 is directly below the first reference line k1 and is parallel to the first reference line k1.
As a result, an imaginary line that extends vertically, intersects with the second reference line k2, and intersects with the rear end (rear end) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 coincides with the first vertical line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the first vertical line becomes the first design portion d1.
In addition, an imaginary line that extends vertically, intersects the second reference line k2, and intersects the lowest portion (lowest portion) of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 coincides with the second vertical line. As described above, the portion of the lower surface 43 of the design portion 40 that intersects with the second vertical line becomes the second design portion d2.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is disposed below (at a lower position) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) A from the first reference line k1 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (4 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance A is the difference in elevation between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the first design portion d1.
In this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) the first reference line k1. In particular, the distance (dimension) B from the first reference line k1 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (40 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance B is the difference in elevation between the position of the first reference line k1 and the position of the second design portion d2.
In this embodiment, the second design part d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) than the first reference line k1, and in particular, the distance B from the first reference line k1 to the second design part d2 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so that the design part 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance A from the first reference line k1 to the first design part d1 is set to be equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball, so that when the game ball is strongly launched by the game ball launching device 430 and the game ball rolls along the outer peripheral surface ra of the guide passage r2, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. In this way, since the visibility of the game ball is ensured in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the game ball and to play normally. As a result, it is possible to play stably.

In this embodiment, the first design portion d1 is disposed above (at a higher position than) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) C from the second reference line k2 to the first design portion d1 is equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball (14 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance C is the difference in elevation between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the first design portion d1.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the second design portion d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) the second reference line k2. In particular, the distance (dimension) D from the second reference line k2 to the second design portion d2 is equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball (22 mm in this embodiment). Here, the distance D is the height difference between the position of the second reference line k2 and the position of the second design portion d2.
In this embodiment, the second design part d2 is disposed below (at a lower position) than the second reference line k2, and in particular, the distance D from the second reference line k2 to the second design part d2 is set to be equal to or greater than the diameter of the game ball, so that the design part 40 can be enlarged in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the distance C from the second reference line k2 to the first design part d1 is set to be equal to or greater than the radius of the game ball, so that when the game ball is weakly launched by the game ball launching device 430 and the game ball rolls along the inner peripheral surface rb of the guide passage r2, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the game ball from the front side. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the game ball is ensured, so that the player is prevented from missing the game ball and can play normally. As a result, it is possible to play stably.

A board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.
The main image display device 31 is attached to the rear side of the set board and is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display.
The main image display device 31 includes a display screen 31a capable of displaying various types of presentation images (moving images and still images).
The display screen 31a can be configured to have three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 (not shown) in which a first performance pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and one second performance pattern display area a4 (not shown) in which a second performance pattern z2 (not shown) is displayed.
The first performance symbol z1 is composed of identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the first performance symbol z1. The second performance symbol z2 is composed of color bars. In the second performance symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the second performance symbol z2.

The changing display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which the first performance pattern z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the type of the second performance pattern z2 displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stopped display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and one type of second performance pattern z2 is displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 (the color bar shows a specified color).
The result of the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is displayed based on the combination of the first performance pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second performance pattern display area a4.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1, b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
The reserved symbol display area b1 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information during notification display (variable display and stop display of special symbols). The reserved symbol display area b2 displays reserved symbols h corresponding to game information for which notification display is pending.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

A first starting opening 51 is provided below the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and game balls can enter at any time. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left path to enter (game balls flowing down the right path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.

To the left of the first starting opening 51 in the game area 30, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 55, a center left other winning opening 56, and a lower left other winning opening 57. Each of the other winning openings 55-57 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 55-57 allows game balls that flow down the left path to enter (game balls that flow down the right path cannot enter).
A left winning hole switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the game board 11. The left winning hole switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the upper left other winning hole 55 (entry of a game ball into the upper left other winning hole 55), a game ball that has entered the center left other winning hole 56 (entry of a game ball into the center left other winning hole 56), and a game ball that has entered the lower left other winning hole 57 (entry of a game ball into the lower left other winning hole 57). In response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of prize balls.

A start gate 41 is provided to the right of the display screen 31a in the game area 30. The start gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left path to pass through).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a gaming ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by a gaming ball). In response to input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104, the main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery.

A large prize opening 53 is provided below the start gate 41 in the game area 30. The large prize opening 53 is provided with a special electric device (special electric device) 53a (so-called "attacker") that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for game balls to enter the large prize opening 53 and an open state that allows game balls to enter the large prize opening 53.
The special electric device 53a is opened and closed by a special electric device solenoid 65 (see FIG. 3). Normally, the special electric device 53a is closed and the big prize opening 53 is not capable of receiving game balls, but when the first or second special symbol lottery is won and a big win game state is generated, the special electric device 53a is opened and the game balls can enter. The big prize opening 53 is capable of receiving game balls that flow down the right path (but not game balls that flow down the left path).
A count switch 103 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the large prize opening 53. The count switch 103 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the large prize opening 53 (entry of a game ball into the large prize opening 53). In response to the input of the detection signal from the count switch 103, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize ball.

A second starting hole 52 is provided below the big winning hole 53 in the game area 30. The second starting hole 52 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 52a (so-called "electric tulip") that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52 and an open state that makes it possible for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.
The normal electric role 52a is opened and closed by a normal electric role solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The second starting port 52 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter, but when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric role 52a is opened so that the game ball can enter. The second starting port 52 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to enter (but does not allow the game ball flowing down the left path to enter).
A special symbol 2 start port switch 102 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second start port 52. The special symbol 2 start port switch 102 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the special symbol 2 start port switch 102.

A right other winning opening 54 is provided below the second starting opening 52 in the game area 30. The right other winning opening 54 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 54 allows game balls that flow down the right path to enter (game balls that flow down the left path cannot enter).
A right winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the right other winning port 54. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 54 (entry of a game ball into the right other winning port 54). In response to input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize balls.

At the lowest position in the game area 30, an outlet 58 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning holes 51 to 57.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls shot into the game area 30 are discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 57 or by passing through the outlet 58, and flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls entering the winning holes 51 to 57 are detected by the switches 101 to 103, 105, and 106 disposed in the winning holes, and then guided to the discharge path. Also, the game balls discharged from the outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51 to 57 and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured of a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is composed of a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a normal chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a special chance display device, and a time-saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LEDs 19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED 24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LEDs 27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LEDs 29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED 31 constitutes the special bonus display device, and LED 32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 2 display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device and the display of the performance patterns z1, z2 in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4 correspond to the time when the varying display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern, respectively.
Then, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.

The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of normal symbols, which are numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol display device then displays the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed. When the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state that is advantageous to the player, is created.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is pending (regular symbol pending number).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during the jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left hand path or right hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
The probability variation display device displays the game status when the power is restored (whether a special chart high probability state is occurring or a special chart low probability state is occurring).
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control being executed or stopped).

In addition, one or more movable body units (not shown) are provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the front frame unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the front frame unit 4 is arranged on the front side of the design portion 40, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit SU, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation space"). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined presentation action in the presentation space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 24 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The performance member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the performance member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a performance position. The performance member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 24 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 24 detects the position of the performance member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 24 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 24 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 24 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Also, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the performance member. Then, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 24, and light is blocked from entering the light receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed in the initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed in the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 24 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is placed in the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 24.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are provided as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the front frame unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2.

The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In addition, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the game board 11. Then, the magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, such as a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 330, a sub-connection board 340, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, and source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in Fig. 6, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
Here, in FIG. 6, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates that the number is hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (the memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.

The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine rules, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the title and version of a program, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2 in the ROM 220. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Meanwhile, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the use area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a set value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information related to an error. The normal game-related area 1 stores a subcommand pointer, etc. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), lottery results, flags for managing the game status, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired upon input of a detection signal from each of the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switch 102, and the gate switch 104.

The non-used area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Furthermore, an unused area M3 of a certain number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in use area m1.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, data stored in the use area M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can proceed (be completed) according to a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to both the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter which generates a winning random number for a normal pattern lottery, a second loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a first special pattern lottery, a third loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a second special pattern lottery, and a fourth loop counter which generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the second loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the third loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter generates reach group random numbers by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 115, etc.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, a handle detection signal from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422, and the like are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from the count switch 103, the right prize slot switch 105, the left prize slot switch 106, the out switch 109, and the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives a detection signal from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, a detection signal from the special diagram 2 start port switch 102, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, etc.

Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor.
Specifically, the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor is set to "1" when a detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (high level), and is set to "0" when no detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from the output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals ("COM0" to "COM3") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, a launch permission signal for detecting launch conditions described below, etc. The common signals output from the output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.

The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric role solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of the special electric role solenoid 65, etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from the output port 4 are then input to the source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured with a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the following states of the gaming machine (hereinafter, "gaming machine state") are defined: a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display sections (not shown). Each display section is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display section is composed of a seven-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, LED 33 to LED 40 are a display section for the first digit, LED 41 to LED 48 are a display section for the second digit, LED 49 to LED 56 are a display section for the third digit, and LED 57 to LED 64 are a display section for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state occurs, the performance display device 206 alternately displays a first base ratio and a second base ratio at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio for the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous interval (the final base ratio calculated for the previous interval).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top two digits display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

When the setting change state occurs, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, it becomes possible to confirm the setting values. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During the occurrence of a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), it is impossible to continue playing the game. During the occurrence of a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top 3 digit displays nothing), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and it becomes possible to rotate (switch) the operation unit from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operation unit is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to each of the display devices 60 and 206 in response to the common signals (“COM 0 ” to “COM 3 ”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in response to the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in response to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .

The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a source driver 250a corresponding to the main display device 60 and a source driver 250b corresponding to the performance display device 206. The application of the power supply voltage Vcc to the data signal lines is controlled separately for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, a common sink driver 240 is provided for the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The grounding of the common signal line is controlled collectively by the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
This eliminates the need to provide sink drivers 240 corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and as a result, it eliminates the need to provide output ports (output ports for outputting common signals) corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.
Therefore, it is possible to reduce the number of components required to control the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, and it is no longer necessary for the main control board 200 (CPU 210) to generate common signals corresponding to each of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206, making it possible to reduce the control load for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206.

Furthermore, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In a test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, probability state of special symbol selection, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in a port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special drawing 1 start port switch 101, the special drawing 2 start port switch 102, the gate switch 104, the count switch 103, the right winning port switch 105, the left winning port switch 106, the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric feature solenoid 64, special electric feature solenoid 65, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of the dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the firing condition detection circuit and the firing control circuit.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation (prize ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the control command received from the main control board 200. The payout control board 400 also controls the game ball payout operation (loan ball payout operation) by the game ball payout device 440 based on the ball loan instruction signal received from the CR unit 700.
In addition, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launching device 430 (launching solenoid 431) based on the resistance value (voltage value) input from the launch volume 411, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
The method of controlling the game ball launching operation by the payout control board 400 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIG. 4, the payout control board 400 is configured to include a launch condition detection circuit 420 and a launch control circuit 425 as circuits for controlling the game ball payout operation.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied.
The firing condition detection circuit 420 is configured to include an operation detection unit 421 , a firing enabling condition detection unit 422 , and a firing condition detection unit 423 .
The operation detection unit 421 is a circuit that detects the rotation operation (amount of rotation operation) of the handle operation unit.
The operation detection unit 421 includes an operational amplifier that controls the output of an operation detection signal (setting the operation detection signal to a high level or low level) in accordance with the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411 .

Specifically, in the firing handle unit 6, the resistance value of the firing volume 411 changes according to the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion. The operation detection portion 421 detects the resistance value (voltage value) of the firing volume 411, and detects whether or not the handle operating portion is being rotated and the amount of rotation of the handle operating portion based on the detected resistance value (voltage value).
When the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it generates an operation detection signal and outputs the generated operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the operation detection unit 421 does not detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, it stops outputting the operation detection signal to the launch enable condition detection unit 422 (sets the operation detection signal to a low level).
In addition, when the operation detection unit 421 detects a rotational operation of the handle operating unit, it generates a firing intensity signal corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the handle operating unit (the resistance value of the firing volume 411), and outputs the generated firing intensity signal to the firing control circuit 425.

The launch enabling condition detection unit 422 is a circuit that detects the establishment of a launch enabling condition.
The launch condition detection unit 422 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of a specified signal depending on the result of a logical AND operation of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal, and a transistor that switches the output/stop of the handle detection signal depending on the specified signal output from the AND gate IC.
The "launch enabling condition" is a condition related to the player's operation (the player's intention) among the multiple conditions that make up the launch conditions described below.
The conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit), (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button).

In this embodiment, the launch possible condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect a rotation operation of the handle operation unit, (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player, and (3) the firing stop switch 413 does not detect a press operation of the firing stop button. On the other hand, when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met, the launch possible condition is not met.
Here, the conditions for enabling firing include (1) a condition based on the detection status of the firing volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 (detection status of the rotation operation of the handle operation unit) and (2) a condition based on the detection status of the touch sensor 412 (detection status of the player's contact with the handle operation unit), and (3) a condition based on the detection status of the firing stop switch 413 (detection status of the operation of pressing the firing stop button) may not be included.
In other words, the launchable condition is met when both of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch volume 441 and the operation detection unit 421 detect the rotational operation of the handle operation unit, and (2) the touch sensor 412 detects contact with the handle operation unit by the player. Alternatively, the launchable condition may not be met when at least one of the conditions (1) and (2) is not met.

Specifically, the launch possible condition detection unit 422 detects whether or not the launch possible condition is met based on the operation detection signal input from the operation detection unit 421, the touch signal input from the touch sensor 412, and the launch stop signal input from the launch stop switch 413.
At this time, the launch enabling condition detection unit 422 detects the establishment of the launch enabling condition when the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal are all input, whereas the establishment of the launch enabling condition is not detected when at least one of the operation detection signal, the touch signal, and the launch stop signal is not input.
When the launchable condition detection unit 422 detects that the launchable condition is met, it generates a handle detection signal and outputs the generated handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the launchable condition detection unit 422 does not detect that the launchable condition is met, it stops outputting the handle detection signal to each of the main control board 200 and the launch condition detection unit 423 (sets the handle detection signal to a low level).

The firing condition detection unit 423 is a circuit that detects whether a firing condition is met.
The firing condition detection unit 423 includes an AND gate IC (logic IC) that controls the output/stop of the firing signal depending on the result of the logical AND operation of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal.
The "launch conditions" are conditions for executing the launch of a game ball (game ball launching operation) into the game area 30 by the game ball launching device 430 (launch solenoid 431).
In this embodiment, the launch condition is met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the launch enable condition is met, (2) a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200, and (3) a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700. On the other hand, the launch condition is not met when at least one of the conditions (1) to (3) is not met.
The "launch permission signal" is output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423 when a playable state is set, assuming that communication is possible between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 (the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected).

Here, during the period when the power is turned on to the main control board 200, regardless of the state of the gaming machine, the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423. In other words, when communication between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 is possible (when the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400 are electrically connected), the launch permission signal may be output from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection unit 423.
The "CR connection signal" is output from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection unit 423 when communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 (when the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400 are electrically connected).

Specifically, the launch condition detection unit 423 detects whether the launch conditions are met based on the handle detection signal input from the launch enable condition detection unit 422, the launch permission signal input from the main control board 200, and the CR connection signal input from the CR unit 700.
At this time, the firing condition detection unit 423 detects the establishment of the firing condition when the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal are all inputted, whereas the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect the establishment of the firing condition when at least one of the handle detection signal, the firing permission signal, and the CR connection signal is not inputted.
When the firing condition detection unit 423 detects that the firing condition is satisfied, it generates a firing signal and outputs the generated firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a high level). On the other hand, when the firing condition detection unit 423 does not detect that the firing condition is satisfied, it stops outputting the firing signal to the firing control circuit 425 (sets the firing signal to a low level).

The launch control circuit 425 is a circuit that controls the launch strength of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430 and the launch timing of the game balls by the game ball launcher 430. In other words, the launch control circuit 425 controls the output of a drive signal to the game ball launcher 430 (launch solenoid 431).
Specifically, the firing control circuit 425 includes a clock generating section (not shown), a firing timing control section (not shown), and a firing solenoid driving section (not shown).
The clock generating section outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency to the emission timing control section.
The firing timing control unit generates a pulse signal for controlling the firing timing based on the clock signal input from the clock generating unit, and outputs the generated pulse signal to the firing solenoid driving unit. At this time, the firing timing control unit generates the pulse signal so that the number of game balls fired per minute is a predetermined number (e.g., 100 [balls]).
The firing solenoid drive unit controls the output of a drive signal to the firing solenoid 431 based on a firing signal input from the firing condition detection unit 423, a pulse signal input from the firing timing control unit, and a firing intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
Specifically, when a launch signal is input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit, in response to a pulse signal input from the launch timing control unit, outputs a drive signal (drive current) corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421 to the launch solenoid 431. This causes the game ball to be launched with an intensity corresponding to the launch intensity signal input from the operation detection unit 421.
On the other hand, when the launch signal is not input from the launch condition detection unit 423, the launch solenoid drive unit stops outputting the drive signal to the launch solenoid 431. This stops the launch of the game balls.

The game ball launching device 430 includes a striking hammer (not shown) and a launch solenoid 431 that drives the striking hammer. The launch solenoid 431 is a rotary solenoid. The striking hammer may be driven by another driving source such as a motor.
Game balls are supplied to the game ball launcher 430 from a ball feed unit (not shown). When a drive signal is input to the launch solenoid 431, the launch solenoid 431 is driven in response to the input drive signal, and the game ball is shot out by the hitting mallet. This causes the game ball to be launched into the game area 30.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, assuming that a playable state is set in the main control board 200 and that communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the payout control board 400, when the handle operation part is rotated (displaced from the initial position toward the limit position) by the player's contact without the firing stop button being pressed, the game ball firing operation by the game ball launcher 430 is started. Then, while the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is being performed, the game ball is launched into the play area 30 with a strength according to the amount of rotation of the handle operation part.
Furthermore, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. That is, even if the handle operation unit is being rotated by contact with the player, when the launch stop button is pressed, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.
Furthermore, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position (when the handle operation unit is not being rotated), the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped. In other words, even if the player is in contact with the handle operation unit, when the handle operation unit is returned to the initial position, the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 is stopped.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, while a state in which the launch conditions are met (hereinafter referred to as the "launch state") occurs, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection unit 422 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In other words, during a state in which rotation operation of the handle operating unit is detected, contact with the handle operating unit is detected, and pressing of the launch stop button is not detected (launch possible state), the output of the handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained.
In this case, as long as the launch-enabled state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the launch condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained, regardless of whether a launch permission signal is input from the main control board 200 to the launch condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of the gaming machine state set in the main control board 200).
Furthermore, as long as the firing possible state is occurring, the output of a handle detection signal from the firing condition detection circuit 420 to the main control board 200 is maintained regardless of whether a CR connection signal is input from the CR unit 700 to the firing condition detection circuit 420 (regardless of whether communication is possible between the CR unit 700 and the dispensing control board 400).
As a result of the above, the main control board 200 is able to detect (grasp) whether or not a launch-enabled state is occurring, and it becomes possible to control the progress of the game, the content of the presentation, etc., depending on the occurrence status of the launch-enabled state.

In other words, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input (the handle detection signal has changed from a low level to a high level), it transmits a game status designation command to the performance control board 300, specifying the occurrence (start) of a launch-ready state.
On the other hand, when the main control board 200 detects that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state (the handle detection signal has changed from a high level to a low level), it sends a game status designation command to the performance control board 300, specifying the release (end) of the launch-ready state.
This enables the performance control board 300 to detect the occurrence of a launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the occurrence of a launch-ready state, and to detect the cancellation of the launch-ready state by receiving a game status designation command that specifies the cancellation of the launch-ready state.
The performance control board 300 is then able to change the content of the performance depending on whether or not a firing-ready state is occurring.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
Fig. 5 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the performance control board. Fig. 52 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the sound circuit. Fig. 54 is a diagram showing the settings of the channel router.
The performance control board 300 controls the performances (display performances, sound performances, lamp performances, movable body performances, etc.) based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
As shown in FIG. 5, the performance control board 300 is configured to include a microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 301 and various external devices externally connected to the microcomputer 301.
In this embodiment, various external devices include a control ROM 302, a character generator read only memory (CGROM) 303, a dynamic random access memory (DRAM) 304, a digital amplifier 305, and the like.

The control ROM 302 stores a control program for controlling the operation of the microcomputer 301, various data required for executing the control program, various command lists set in the control register of the sound circuit 323, various operation parameters (such as frequency correction parameters) transmitted to the digital amplifier 305, etc. In particular, the control ROM 302 stores (memorizes) performance scenario data corresponding to each performance number, an animation table corresponding to each display performance number, a command list corresponding to each sound performance control number, various compressed lamp drive data, and various compressed motor drive data.
The "compressed lamp drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) the lamp drive data in a predetermined format. The "lamp drive data" is data for driving the various lamps 20, 21 (data specifying the luminance values of the lamps 20, 21 belonging to each system).
The "compressed motor drive data" is data obtained by compressing (encoding) motor drive data in a predetermined format. The "motor drive data" is data for driving various motors 23 (data that specifies the output value of each motor 23).
In this embodiment, a NOR type flash memory (NOR type ROM) is used as the control ROM 302. Here, the control ROM 302 may be configured to use an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory).
The control ROM 302 is connected to the HOST interface 313 of the microcomputer 301 .

The CGROM 303 stores (memorizes) various types of compressed image data, various types of compressed audio data, and the like.
"Compressed image data" is data that has been compressed (encoded) into a specific format. "Image data (material data)" is data of an image (moving image or still image) that is used as the material for drawing processing.
The "compressed audio data" is audio data compressed (encoded) in a predetermined format. The "audio data" is audio data output from the various speakers 22.
In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory (NAND type ROM) is used as the CGROM 303. Specifically, the CGROM 303 is configured of an SSD (Solid State Drive) that uses a NAND type flash memory as a storage unit.
The CGROM 303 is connected to a CG bus interface 314 of the microcomputer 301. The CG bus interface 314 is a connection interface conforming to the SATA (Serial AT Attachment) standard, whereby various data stored in the CGROM 303 is read out and transferred via SATA.

The DRAM 304 is provided with a preload area, into which various data (specifically, compressed image data, compressed audio data, etc.) stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded).
A drawing command buffer area is also provided in the DRAM 304. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the drawing command buffer area, and the DRAM 304 is provided with two drawing command buffer areas.
The two drawing command buffer areas are configured to be the same size. During a period in which one of the two drawing command buffer areas is designated as a construction area, the other drawing command buffer area is designated as a transfer area. In addition, for each drawing command buffer area, the designation as a construction area and the designation as a transfer area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each drawing command buffer area, during the period designated as the construction area, a display list, which will be described later, is stored (generated and constructed) in that drawing command buffer area, and during the period designated as the transfer area, the display list stored in that drawing command buffer area is transferred to the VDP (specifically, the preloader circuit 319).
The DRAM 304 is connected to a DRAM interface 315 of the microcomputer 301 .

The microcomputer 301 is an LSI in which a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, and the like are integrated.
The microcomputer 301 controls the performance operations of various performance means based on control commands received from the main control board 200.
The "various performance means" include various image display devices 31, 32, various speakers 22, various lamps 20, 21, and various motors 23 (various movable bodies). Therefore, the "performance actions by various performance means" include display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32, output of sound by the various speakers 22, driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21, driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies), etc.
The microcomputer 301 includes internal devices such as a CPU 310, a CPU work memory 311, a CPU interface 312, a host interface 313, a CG bus interface 314, a DRAM interface 315, a VRAM 316, a serial communication controller 317, a transfer circuit 318, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, and a sound circuit 323, and these internal devices are bus-connected to a data bus 324.

The CPU 310 is connected to a HOST interface 313 via a CPU interface 312. The main control board 200 is also connected to the HOST interface 313, and control commands are input from the main control board 200. Furthermore, a data bus 324 is connected to the HOST interface 313.
This enables the CPU 310 to receive control commands (sub-commands) from the main control board 200 via the HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of communicating with internal devices such as a serial communication controller 317 , a preloader circuit 319 , a display circuit 320 , and a sound circuit 323 via a HOST interface 313 and a data bus 324 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (control programs, control data, etc.) stored in the control ROM 302 via a HOST interface 313 .
In addition, the CPU 310 is capable of reading out various data (compressed audio data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the HOST interface 313 , the data bus 324 , and the CG bus interface 314 .
Furthermore, the CPU 310 is capable of reading and writing data from and to the DRAM 304 via a HOST interface 313 , a data bus 324 , and a DRAM interface 315 .

The CPU 310 executes various arithmetic processes required to control the performance actions of the various performance means, control processes of internal devices in accordance with the various arithmetic processes, and the like.
At this time, the CPU 310 uses a CPU work memory (RAM) 311 and a DRAM 304 as a work area for various arithmetic processes, a buffer area for various arithmetic process data, a table data area, a buffer area for various input/output data, and the like.
That is, the CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and selects and sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number. Also, in accordance with the selected and set effect scenario data, it generates command information (internal commands) for sequentially controlling various internal devices (VDP, sound circuit 323, lamp controller 317a, motor controller 317b, etc.).

Specifically, the CPU 310 sets an animation table in the animation table setting area in accordance with the command information, and generates a display list in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area in accordance with the set animation table.
A "display list" is a collection of drawing commands for one frame. That is, the drawing commands for one frame are described in a predetermined order in the display list. Then, in the VDP, processing based on each drawing command is executed in the order described in the display list, thereby generating drawing data for one frame.
The "drawing command" is information that specifies the contents of the drawing process (drawing control) to be executed by the VDP. In particular, the drawing command specifies the address of the memory area where the compressed image data used for drawing is stored (hereinafter referred to as the "image address"), the magnification (enlargement ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn, the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn, the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency rate) when the image data is drawn, etc.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 .
That is, while a NAND type flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can be easily increased in capacity compared to a NOR type flash memory such as the control ROM 302, the data read speed is slow. Therefore, if compressed audio data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND type flash memory) when the sound circuit 323 executes the audio output process, there is a risk of a significant decrease in processing performance.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the sound output process is executed, the compressed sound data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, by configuring the system so that the compressed sound data is read from the DRAM 304 when the sound output process is executed, a decrease in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, when the power is turned on, the CPU 310 transfers (preloads) predetermined compressed audio data from among the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, in this embodiment, all of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304. Here, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which only a portion of the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the preload area of the DRAM 304.
Then, in the pachinko machine 1, after the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323). In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to execute control of the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323).
After the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to control the display of the performance image (drawing process by the VDP) by the various image display devices 31, 32. In other words, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes impossible to control the display of the performance image by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing process by the VDP).
On the other hand, before the transfer of the above-mentioned predetermined compressed audio data is completed, it becomes possible to execute control of the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp driving process by the lamp controller 317a).
Before the transfer of the predetermined compressed audio data is completed, the control of the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by the motor controller 317b) can be executed.

The transfer circuit 318 transfers various types of data between internal devices.
Specifically, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list stored in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area to the preloader circuit 319. In addition, the transfer circuit 318 transfers the display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 to the drawing circuit 322.

The VRAM 316 is provided with an image development area, in which image data (material data) developed (restored and decoded) by the graphics decoder circuit 321 is temporarily stored.
A frame buffer area is also provided in the VRAM 316. In this embodiment, a double buffering method is adopted for the frame buffer area, and the VRAM 316 is provided with two frame buffer areas.
The two frame buffer areas are configured to be the same size. While one of the two frame buffer areas is designated as a drawing area, the other frame buffer area is designated as an output area. Furthermore, for each frame buffer area, the designation as a drawing area and the designation as an output area are alternated for each frame.
Then, for each frame buffer area, during the period designated as the drawing area, one frame's worth of drawing data is stored (generated and drawn) in that frame buffer area, and during the period designated as the output area, a video signal is output based on the one frame's worth of drawing data stored in that frame buffer area.

In the microcomputer 301, a preloader circuit 319, a display circuit 320, a graphics decoder circuit 321, a drawing circuit 322, etc. function as a VDP (Video Display Processor).
The VDP controls the display of the effect image by the various image display devices 31, 32. Specifically, the VDP generates drawing data in response to receiving a display list (drawing commands) from the CPU 310, generates a video signal based on the generated drawing data, and outputs the generated video signal to the various image display devices 31, 32.
The preloader circuit 319 is capable of reading out various data (compressed image data) stored in the CGROM 303 via the CG bus interface 314 .
In particular, the preloader circuit 319 transfers (preloads) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304 before the drawing process is executed by the drawing circuit 322 .
That is, as described above, a NAND flash memory such as the CGROM 303 can be easily increased in capacity, but has a slower data read speed, compared to a NOR flash memory such as the control ROM 302. For this reason, if compressed image data is directly read from the CGROM 303 (NAND flash memory) when the drawing circuit 322 executes the drawing process, there is a risk that the processing performance will be significantly degraded.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, before the drawing process is executed, the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred to the DRAM 304, which is a storage means having a faster data read speed than the CGROM 303. Then, by configuring the system so that the compressed image data is read from the DRAM 304 when the drawing process is executed, a decrease in processing performance is prevented.

Specifically, every time the preloader circuit 319 receives a display list, it transfers (preloads) one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list, from among the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303, to a preload area of the DRAM 304. At this time, the preloader circuit 319 rewrites the display list.
That is, in the display list generated by the CPU 310, an address specifying a storage area of the CGROM 303 is described as the image address included in each drawing command. Therefore, for each drawing command included in the display list, the preloader circuit 319 transfers the compressed image data stored in the storage area (storage area of the CGROM 303) specified by the image address included in the drawing command to a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and then rewrites the image address included in the drawing command to an address specifying the storage area after transfer (the predetermined area of the DRAM 304). As a result, a new display list in which the image address has been rewritten is generated.
In this embodiment, the preloader circuit 319 is configured to transfer (preload) the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a preload area of the DRAM 304. However, the preloader circuit 319 may be configured to transfer the compressed image data stored in the CGROM 303 to a predetermined area (preload area) of the VRAM 316.
The display list rewritten by the preloader circuit 319 is transferred by the transfer circuit 318 to the drawing circuit 320 .

The drawing circuit 322 stores (generates and draws) one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area in accordance with the display list received from the preloader circuit 319 .
Specifically, each time the drawing circuit 320 receives a display list, it reads out one frame's worth of compressed image data specified in the display list from the DRAM 304. The one frame's worth of compressed image data read out from the DRAM 304 is restored (decoded) by the graphic decoder circuit 321 and stored (expanded) in an image expansion area of the VRAM 316. Then, the drawing circuit 320 uses the image data stored in the image expansion area to generate one frame's worth of drawing data in the frame buffer area specified as the drawing area.

The display circuit 320 generates a video signal based on one frame of drawing data stored (generated and drawn) in a frame buffer area specified as an output area, and outputs the generated video signal to various image display devices 31, 32. In this embodiment, a digital RGB signal is output as the video signal. Here, a configuration in which an LVDS (Low voltage differential signaling) signal is output as the video signal may also be used.
Specifically, the display circuit 320 is configured to include a data acquisition circuit (not shown), a scaler circuit (not shown), a color correction circuit (not shown), a ditherer circuit (not shown), a synchronization signal generation circuit (not shown), and the like.
The data acquisition circuit reads out drawing data stored in a frame buffer area designated as an output area.
The scaler circuit is capable of performing scaling processing (enlargement and reduction processing) on the drawing data read out by the data acquisition circuit.

The color correction circuit is capable of performing color correction processing on the drawing data after processing by the scaler circuit.
The ditherer circuit is capable of performing dithering processing on the drawing data after processing by the color correction circuit.
Then, the drawing data processed by the dithering circuit is output as a video signal (digital RGB signal).
The synchronization signal generation circuit generates a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync). The synchronization signal generation circuit then outputs the generated horizontal synchronization signal and vertical synchronization signal to the various image display devices 31 and 32. The synchronization signal generation circuit also outputs the generated vertical synchronization signal to the CPU 310.
In this embodiment, the display of the effect image (the display of the effect image based on one frame's worth of drawing data) in each of the image display devices 31, 32 is updated every 16.66 [ms]. Therefore, the synchronization signal generation circuit outputs a vertical synchronization signal (set to high level) to the CPU 310 every 16.66 [ms].

The sound circuit 323 (built-in sound source) controls the output (reproduction) of sounds (performance sounds) from the various speakers 22 .
As shown in FIG. 52, the sound circuit 323 is configured to include 40 tracks (track 1 to track 40), 8 audio buses (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8), 8 channels (channel 1 to channel 8), and a control register (not shown).
In this embodiment, the various speakers 22 include an upper left speaker, an upper right speaker, a center left speaker, a center right speaker, a lower speaker, and a woofer. Each channel is connected (electrically connected) to one speaker via a digital amplifier 305. Specifically, the upper left speaker is connected to channel 1, the upper right speaker is connected to channel 2, the center left speaker is connected to channel 3, the center right speaker is connected to channel 4, the lower speaker is connected to channel 5, and the woofer is connected to channel 6. On the other hand, no speaker is connected to channels 7 and 8.
Here, the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, and the center right speaker are configured as high- and mid-range speakers (full-range speakers). On the other hand, the lower speaker and the woofer are configured as low-range speakers. Compared to the lower speaker, the woofer has a lower output frequency band (its frequency characteristics are in a low frequency band) and a larger output (W).
The sound circuit 323 is equipped with an independent sequencer (not shown) for each track, which makes it possible to control the playback, stopping, volume, etc. of audio data independently for each track.
Each track is provided with a compressed audio decoder 351, a track fader 352, a programmable pan 353, and the like.
The compressed audio decoder 351 restores (decodes) compressed audio data. The track fader 352 sets the volume of the track. The programmable pan 353 controls the positioning of the sound by outputting the audio data of the track to an arbitrary audio bus.

The eight audio buses are provided with a switcher 354, a ducker 355, a channel router 356, and the like.
The switcher 354 assigns audio data from the eight audio buses and audio data from the eight external serial inputs (not shown) to the eight audio buses. In this embodiment, the eight external serial inputs are unused. The ducker 355 ducks (reduces) the volume of the other audio buses based on the volume of audio data input from a specific audio bus among the eight audio buses. The channel router 356 sets the association between each audio bus (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) and each channel (channel 1 to channel 8).

54, in this embodiment, audio bus 1 and channel 1 are linked by a channel router 356. Also, an audio signal generated by channel 1 is input to the upper left speaker. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to audio bus 1 is output by the upper left speaker.
Furthermore, the channel router 356 links the audio bus 2 with the channel 2. Furthermore, the audio signal generated by the channel 2 is input to the upper right speaker. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to the audio bus 2 is output from the upper right speaker.
In addition, the channel router 356 connects the audio bus 3 and the channel 3. In addition, the audio signal generated by the channel 3 is input to the left center speaker. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to the audio bus 3 is output from the left center speaker.
Furthermore, audio bus 4 and channel 4 are linked by channel router 356. Furthermore, the audio signal generated by channel 4 is input to the center right speaker. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to audio bus 4 is output from the center right speaker.

Furthermore, the channel router 356 connects the audio bus 5 and the channel 5. Furthermore, the audio signal generated by the channel 5 is input to the lower speaker. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 is output from the lower speaker.
Furthermore, the audio bus 6 and the channel 6 are linked by the channel router 356. Furthermore, the audio signal generated by the channel 6 is input to the woofer. As a result, audio based on the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is output by the woofer.
Furthermore, the channel router 356 connects the audio bus 7 and the channel 6. As a result, sound based on the audio data assigned to the audio bus 7 is output by the woofer.
On the other hand, audio bus 8 is not connected to any channel by channel router 356 .
As described above, in this embodiment, channels 7 and 8 are not in use, and no audio data is input to them.

The eight channels include a channel volume 357, an equalizer 358, a limiter 359, a post-effector 360, a master volume 361, an audio serial output 362, and the like.
The channel volume 357 sets the volume of each channel. The equalizer 358 sets the emphasis/attenuation of a specific frequency band for each channel (corrects the frequency). In this embodiment, the equalizer 358 is not used. The limiter 359 prevents clipping by compressing sounds that exceed a threshold for each channel. The post-effector 360 sets the emphasis/attenuation of a specific frequency band, the volume, a delay in sound generation timing, etc. for each channel. The master volume 361 sets the volume for all channels at once. The audio serial output 362 converts the audio data of each channel so that it can be serially transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.

The CPU 310 sets the command list read from the control ROM 302 in accordance with the command information in the control register of the sound circuit 323. This causes the sound circuit 323 to operate in accordance with the command list set in the control register.
The "command list" is information that specifies the operation of the sound circuit 323. As described above, a command list corresponding to each sound performance control number is stored.
In this embodiment, the command lists include a command list for specifying the start of a sound performance, a command list for specifying an adjustment of the volume, a command list for specifying the end of a sound performance, and the like.
The command list that specifies the start of sound performance includes information that specifies the compressed audio data to start playing, information that specifies the track to which the compressed audio data is to be assigned, information that specifies the number of times that the compressed audio data is to be played, information that specifies the volume of that compressed audio data (audio data), information that specifies the panpot ratio of that compressed audio data (audio data), and the like.
The "panpot ratio" is information that specifies the audio bus (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8) to which audio data is assigned. In other words, the panpot ratio is information that specifies the volume of each audio bus when assigning audio data to each audio bus. In this embodiment, the panpot ratio specifies the volume balance of the eight audio buses (audio bus 1 to audio bus 8). Specifically, the panpot ratio specifies the volume ratio of audio bus 1 to audio bus 8.
On the other hand, the command list for specifying a volume adjustment includes information for specifying the track for which the volume is to be adjusted, information for specifying the adjustment content, and the like.
On the other hand, the command list specifying the end of the sound performance includes information specifying the track at which playback is to be stopped.
As described above, in this embodiment, playback, stopping, volume adjustment, etc. of audio data are controlled for each track.

The serial communication controller 317 includes a lamp controller 317a and a motor controller 317b.
The lamp controller 317 a controls the driving (light emission) of the various lamps 20 and 21 .
Specifically, the CPU 310 sets the LED register according to command information (messages) set in a lamp command buffer area, which will be described later. The lamp controller 317a then generates lamp drive data in accordance with the settings of the LED register, and outputs the generated lamp drive data together with a clock signal to the lamp drivers 332 and 342. At this time, the lamp drive data is output as serial data.
The lamp controller 317a includes a lamp decoder circuit (not shown). The lamp decoder circuit reads compressed lamp drive data designated by command information from the control ROM 302. It also restores (decodes) the read compressed lamp drive data. Then, it generates lamp drive data based on the restored lamp drive data, and outputs the generated lamp drive data to the lamp drivers 332 and 342.

The motor controller 317b controls the driving of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies).
Specifically, the CPU 310 sets a motor register according to command information (messages) set in a movable body command buffer area described later. Then, the motor controller 317b generates motor drive data according to the settings of the motor register, and outputs the generated motor drive data together with a clock signal to the motor drivers 333 and 343. At this time, the motor drive data is output as serial data.
The motor controller 317b includes a motor sequencer circuit (not shown). The motor sequencer circuit reads compressed motor drive data specified by command information from the control ROM 302. It also restores (decodes) the read compressed motor drive data. It then generates motor drive data based on the restored motor drive data and outputs the generated motor drive data to the motor drivers 333 and 343.
In addition, information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 is input to the motor controller 317b from the driver board 330, and information indicating the detection status of each switch 25 to 29 and information indicating the detection status of the various sensors 24 are input from the sub-connection board 340.

(Reduction of current consumption by ducking function)
Next, the reduction in current consumption (power consumption) by the ducking function will be described.
Fig. 55 is a diagram for explaining the ducking function. Fig. 56 is a diagram showing the contents of the command list corresponding to sound effects A and B.
In the pachinko machine 1, an overcurrent protection circuit (not shown) is provided in a path that supplies current (power) from the power supply board 600 to various devices (various lamps 20, 21, various speakers 22, various motors 23, etc.) The overcurrent protection circuit cuts off (or limits) the output of current to the various devices when it detects an output of current exceeding a predetermined value.
Here, the woofer has a larger output (W) than the other speakers (the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, the center right speaker, and the lower speaker). Therefore, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer increases, the current consumption by the woofer increases, and as a result, the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 increases, which may cause the overcurrent protection circuit to operate and cut off (or limit) the output of current to various devices.
On the other hand, in a sound production composed of sounds output from various speakers 22 (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, center left speaker, center right speaker, lower speaker, and woofer), if the volume of the sound output from the woofer is lowered, the impression of the low-frequency range will be weakened, the image of the sound production will be damaged, and the effect of the sound production may be reduced.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the ducking function of the ducker 355 is used to suppress an increase in the total volume output by the various speakers 22, thereby suppressing an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22. In this case, in this embodiment, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds a predetermined threshold, the volume of the sound output from the other speakers is reduced. Specifically, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold, the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker, whose frequency characteristics overlap with the woofer (whose outputtable frequency bands overlap), is reduced.
This makes it possible to prevent the image of the sound production from being damaged (preventing the impression of the low-frequency range from being weakened) while suppressing an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22.
The "total volume output by the various speakers 22" is the maximum value of the total volume output by all speakers (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, center left speaker, center right speaker, lower speaker, and woofer) while a sound performance is being executed.
The "total current consumption by various speakers 22" is the maximum value of the total current consumption output by all speakers (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, center left speaker, center right speaker, lower speaker, and woofer) while a sound performance is being executed.

Here, in a sound production in which the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 exceeds a predetermined value due to the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeding a threshold (hereinafter referred to as "high volume sound production"), there is a risk that the overcurrent protection circuit will be activated when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold. Therefore, in a high volume sound production, when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold, it is necessary to reduce the volume of the sound output from the other speakers (specifically, the lower speaker).
On the other hand, in a sound production in which the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value even if the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold (hereinafter referred to as "low volume sound production"), there is no risk of the overcurrent protection circuit activating when the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold. Therefore, in a low volume sound production, even if the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold, there is no need to reduce the volume of the sound output from other speakers (specifically, the lower speaker).
Therefore, in this embodiment, among audio buses 1 to 8, audio bus 8 to which a speaker is not connected (audio bus 8 to which an audio signal based on assigned audio data is not output to a speaker) is used to control the activation/deactivation of the ducking function depending on the type of sound presentation (loud volume sound presentation/low volume sound presentation).

That is, in this embodiment, the ducker 355 is set to reduce (duck) the volume of the audio bus 5 to which the lower speaker is connected, based on the input of the audio bus 8 to which no speaker is connected.
Specifically, the ducker 355 is set to constantly monitor the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 while the power is on to the pachinko machine 1, and when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 exceeds a threshold, the ducking function is activated to reduce (lower, limit, suppress) the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5. In addition, when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 falls below the threshold after the ducking function is activated, the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 is set to return to the original volume.
In the command list that specifies the start of a loud sound performance, a panpot ratio is specified so that, among the audio data that constitutes the loud sound performance, the audio data that is assigned to audio bus 6 is also assigned to audio bus 8 at the same volume as audio bus 6.

As a result, when a high-volume sound performance is performed, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is also assigned to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as the audio bus 6. That is, the same audio data is assigned to the audio bus 6 and the audio bus 8 at the same volume. As a result, when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8 exceeds the threshold value, the ducker 355 reduces the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5. In other words, when the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, the ducker 355 reduces the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5. Therefore, when the volume of the audio output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, it is possible to reduce the volume of the audio output from the lower speaker. Note that the same audio data as a part of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 (any of the element data among the multiple element data constituting the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6) may be assigned to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as the audio bus 6.
On the other hand, in a command list that specifies the start of a low volume sound effect, a panpot ratio is specified so that, among the audio data that constitutes the low volume sound effect, the audio data that is assigned to the audio bus 6 is not assigned to the audio bus 8. In other words, in a command list that specifies the start of a low volume sound effect, audio data is not assigned to the audio bus 8.
As a result, when a low volume sound production is performed, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is not assigned to the audio bus 8. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound output from the woofer exceeds the threshold, the volume of the sound output from the lower speaker is not reduced.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1, the types of sound effects are defined as sound effects A and B. Sound effect A is a loud sound effect. On the other hand, sound effect B is a quiet sound effect.
That is, in sound performance A, the volume output from the woofer exceeds a threshold value at a predetermined timing. In sound performance A, when the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 exceeds a predetermined value, and there is a risk that the overcurrent protection circuit will be activated.
Therefore, in sound performance A, when the volume output from the woofer exceeds a threshold value, a ducking function is activated to reduce the volume output from the lower speaker.
On the other hand, in sound effect B, the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold at a predetermined timing. However, in sound effect B, even if the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold, the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value, and there is no risk of the overcurrent protection circuit being activated.
Therefore, in sound performance B, even if the volume output from the woofer exceeds the threshold value, the ducking function does not operate and the volume output from the lower speaker is maintained.
The specific details will be explained below.

Sound performance A is composed of audio data A (compressed audio data A), audio data B (compressed audio data B), audio data C (compressed audio data C), and audio data D (compressed audio data D).
The audio data A is vocal audio data. The audio data B is guitar audio data. The audio data C is bass sound 1 audio data. The audio data D is bass sound 2 audio data.
As shown in FIG. 56 (a), the command list (hereinafter referred to as "command list A") specifying the start of sound performance A specifies the playback of audio data A (compressed audio data A), audio data B (compressed audio data B), audio data C (compressed audio data C), and audio data D (compressed audio data D).
In addition, in command list A, panpot ratios are specified so that audio data A is assigned (output) to each of audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 at a predetermined volume, audio data B is assigned (output) to each of audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 at a predetermined volume, audio data C is assigned (output) to audio bus 5 at a predetermined volume, and audio data D is assigned (output) to each of audio buses 6 and 8 at a predetermined volume.

In particular, in command list A, the panpot ratio is defined for audio data D so that the audio data D is assigned to audio buses 6 and 8 at the same volume.
As a result, in the sound performance A, the audio data A is reproduced by each of the audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 (each of the channels 1, 2, 3, and 4), and the audio (vocals) based on the audio data A is output by the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, and the center right speaker. Also, the audio data B is reproduced by each of the audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 (each of the channels 1, 2, 3, and 4), and the audio (guitar sound) based on the audio data B is output by the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, and the center right speaker. Also, the audio data C is reproduced by the audio bus 5 (channel 5), and the audio (bass sound 1) based on the audio data C is output by the lower speaker. Also, the audio data D is reproduced by the audio bus 6 (channel 6), and the audio (bass sound 2) based on the audio data D is output by the woofer.
In particular, the ducker 355 monitors the volume of the compressed data D assigned to the audio bus 8, and when the volume of the compressed data D exceeds a threshold, the volume of the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is reduced. When the volume of the compressed data D falls below the threshold, the volume of the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is restored to the original volume specified in the command list A.
As a result of the above, in sound performance A, at a predetermined timing, the volume of the audio data D assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 exceeds a threshold value, and at this time, the volume of the compressed data C assigned to the audio bus 5 is reduced.
This prevents the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 from exceeding a predetermined value even if the volume of the audio data D assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 exceeds a threshold value, thereby preventing the overcurrent protection circuit from being activated.
In particular, when the volume of the sound output by the woofer exceeds a threshold value, it is possible to suppress an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 while maintaining the volume of the sound output by the woofer.

Sound performance B is composed of sound data E (compressed sound data E), sound data F (compressed sound data F), sound data G (compressed sound data G), and sound data H (compressed sound data H).
The audio data E is vocal audio data. The audio data F is guitar audio data. The audio data G is bass sound 1 audio data. The audio data H is bass sound 2 audio data.
Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), a command list (hereinafter referred to as "command list B") specifying the start of sound performance B specifies the playback of audio data E (compressed audio data E), playback of audio data F (compressed audio data F), playback of audio data G (compressed audio data G), and playback of audio data H (compressed audio data H).
In command list B, panpot ratios are defined so that audio data E is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to each of audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4, audio data F is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to each of audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4, audio data G is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to audio bus 5, and audio data H is assigned (output) at a predetermined volume to each audio bus 6. Note that in command list B, compressed data is not assigned to audio bus 8.
As a result, in sound performance B, audio data E is reproduced by each of the audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 (each of the channels 1, 2, 3, and 4), and audio (vocals) based on the audio data E is output by the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, and the center right speaker. Also, audio data F is reproduced by each of the audio buses 1, 2, 3, and 4 (each of the channels 1, 2, 3, and 4), and audio (guitar sound) based on the audio data F is output by the upper left speaker, the upper right speaker, the center left speaker, and the center right speaker. Also, audio data G is reproduced by the audio bus 5 (channel 5), and audio (bass sound 1) based on the audio data G is output by the lower speaker. Also, audio data H is reproduced by the audio bus 6 (channel 6), and audio (bass sound 2) based on the audio data H is output by the woofer.
In particular, the ducker 355 monitors the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 8, but in sound performance B, since no audio data is assigned to the audio bus 8, the ducker function does not operate.
In other words, in sound performance B, at a predetermined timing, the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds a threshold value, but even if the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 does not exceed a predetermined value, and the overcurrent protection circuit does not activate.
Therefore, when the volume of the audio data H assigned to the audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, it is not necessary to reduce the volume of the audio data G assigned to the audio bus 5.
Therefore, in command list B, the audio data H that is assigned to the audio bus 6 is not assigned to the audio bus 8, so that the ducker function is not activated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, for loud sound effects, the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6 is also assigned to the audio bus 8 at the same volume as that of the audio bus 6. When the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio buses 6 and 8 exceeds a threshold value, the ducker function is activated and the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 5 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the total current consumption of the various speakers 22 without reducing the volume of the audio data assigned to the audio bus 6.
On the other hand, for low-volume sound production, by not assigning the audio data assigned to audio bus 6 to audio bus 8, even if the volume of the audio data assigned to audio bus 6 exceeds the threshold value, the ducker function does not operate, and it is possible to maintain the volume of the audio data assigned to audio bus 5.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to control whether the ducker function is activated or deactivated by determining whether or not to assign the audio data to the audio bus 8. Therefore, it is possible to control whether the ducker function is activated or deactivated on an audio data basis.

(Method of controlling performance by performance control board 300)
Next, a method for controlling the performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 selects the effect (effect number) to be executed in response to a control command received from the main control board 200. Then, the CPU 310 sets the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected effect number and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data in the effect scenario setting area of the DRAM 304.
"Performance scenario data" is information that specifies the progress of a performance. Specifically, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data registered in chronological order. That is, the performance scenario data has a plurality of process data and information that specifies the start time (start timing) of processing based on each process data registered therein.
Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information. For example, command information specifying the start of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance), command information specifying the end of a sub-performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance) (hereinafter, referred to as a "performance end command"), etc. are specified as command information.

Furthermore, the CPU 310 controls the progress of the presentation based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 updates the rendering scenario timer set in the rendering scenario setting area at a predetermined cycle, and determines whether or not there is any process data whose start time has arrived among the process data registered in the rendering scenario data set in the rendering scenario setting area based on the updated rendering scenario timer value. If it determines that there is any process data whose start time has arrived, it stores (memorizes) each piece of command information included in the process data in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information regarding the display performance (command information specifying the start of a display performance, command information specifying the end of a display performance, etc.) is stored in the display command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the sound performance (command information specifying various sound performance control numbers) is stored in the sound command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the lamp performance (command information specifying the start of a lamp performance, command information specifying the end of a lamp performance, etc.) is stored in the lamp command buffer area. Meanwhile, command information regarding the movable body performance (command information specifying the start of a movable body performance, command information specifying the end of a movable body performance, etc.) is stored in the movable body command buffer area.

(Display performance control method)
Next, a method for controlling the display performance (display) by the performance control board 300 will be described.
An animation table corresponding to each display effect (each display effect number) is stored in the control ROM 302. The animation table corresponding to each display effect is associated with display priority information corresponding to the display effect (the image constituting the display effect).
The "display priority information" is information that specifies the display priority.
"Display priority" is information that specifies the display (drawing) priority order.
When multiple display effects (displays) are executed at the same time, the display on the display screen 31a (the effect image displayed on the display screen 31a) is configured based on the multiple display effects (images related to the multiple display effects). In this case, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that configure the display (the effect image), the display effect (image) with the higher display priority is displayed with priority over the display effect (image) with the lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) that configure the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the higher the display priority is displayed with priority.
In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the display effect (image) with a higher display priority is displayed closer to the player than the display effects (images) with a lower display priority. In other words, among the multiple display effects (multiple images) constituting the effect image, the higher the display priority of the display effect (image) is, the closer it is displayed to the player.
As a result, if there is an overlapping portion between a display performance (image) with a higher display priority and a display performance (image) with a lower display priority among the multiple display performances (multiple images) that make up the performance image, the display performance (image) with the higher display priority is displayed preferentially for the overlapping portion.

The CPU 310 (display control unit) periodically determines whether command information is stored in the display command buffer area, and when it determines that command information is stored in the display command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the display command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a display effect is stored in the display command buffer area, the animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is read out from the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302. Then, the read animation table is set (stored and registered) in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304.
As a result, the animation table stored in the control ROM 302 is copied into the animation table setting area. Note that it is possible to set a plurality of animation tables in the animation table setting area.

The "animation table" is information (various parameters for controlling the display of images) that specifies the progress of the display performance (display of performance images) by the various image display devices 31, 32. In other words, the animation table is information that specifies the movement of images.
Specifically, a predetermined number of frames of information are registered in chronological order in the animation table, and the display performance progresses by sequentially displaying images based on each frame of information in the predetermined number of frames of information registered in the animation table in the order in which they are registered.
Each frame information is a variety of parameters for controlling (executing and configuring) the display of one frame's worth of image. That is, each frame information is composed of information (image address information) specifying image data (compressed image data) used for drawing, information (display priority information) specifying the display priority of the image data (the display performance), information specifying the magnification (enlargement ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display magnification information"), information specifying the coordinates (coordinates in the frame buffer area) at which the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "display coordinate information"), information specifying the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency) when the image data is drawn (hereinafter referred to as "transmittance information"), and the like.

Then, the CPU 310 controls the display of the effect image corresponding to each frame based on one or more animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, the CPU 310 executes a command construction process, which will be described later, at a predetermined cycle.
In the command construction process, first, the sub-scenario timers corresponding to each animation data set in the display scenario setting area are updated, and then, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area specified in the construction area based on all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, for all animation tables set in the animation table setting area, frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list is obtained from frame information registered in each animation table, and a display list is constructed based on all the obtained frame information.
As a result, the VDP is controlled in accordance with the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area, and the display presentation (display of the presentation image by the main image display device 31) is controlled.
That is, when a piece of animation data is set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies the rendering of the image data specified by that piece of animation data.
On the other hand, when multiple animation data are set in the display scenario setting area, a display list is constructed that specifies that the drawing of the image data specified by the multiple animation data is to be executed in a predetermined order (sequence).
At this time, the order of drawing image data corresponding to the display priority information set in the display scenario setting area is set based on the display priority specified by the display priority information.

(Sound production control method)
Next, a method for controlling sound effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 (sound control unit) periodically determines whether command information is stored in the sound command buffer area. If it determines that command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the sound command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
Specifically, a command list corresponding to the sound effect control number specified by the instruction information is read from the control ROM 302, and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Method of controlling lamp effects)
Next, a method for controlling the lamp effects using the effect control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area. If it determines that command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the CPU 310 analyzes each piece of command information stored in the lamp command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a lamp performance is stored in the lamp command buffer area, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the command information is read out, and the read compressed lamp drive data is set in the lamp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp performance (driving (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(Method of controlling movable body effects)
Next, a method for controlling the movable body performance using the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 periodically determines whether command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, and when it determines that command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, it analyzes each piece of command information stored in the movable body command buffer area and executes processing according to the analysis result.
At this time, if command information specifying the start of a moving body performance is stored in the moving body command buffer area, the compressed motor drive data specified by the command information is read out and the read compressed motor drive data is set in the motor register. As a result, the motor controller 317b controls the moving body performance (the drive of the various motors 23 (various moving bodies)) according to the compressed motor drive data set in the motor register.

(Configuration of the driver board 330)
The driver board 330 includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 , a lamp driver 332 , and a motor driver 333 .
The lamp driver 332 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a brightness value corresponding to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. An excitation signal (drive current) according to the brightness value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 333 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 arranged in the game board unit 10. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified by the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. This controls the drive of each motor 23.
Detection signals from the various sensors 24 are input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331. Then, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 331 converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of the sub-connection board 340)
The sub-connection board 340 is configured to include a parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 , a lamp driver 342 , and a motor driver 343 .
The lamp driver 342 controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system constituting the frame lamp 20 in accordance with the lamp driving data input from the lamp controller 317a.
At this time, the lamp drive data specifies a luminance value corresponding to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. An excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the luminance value specified in the lamp drive data is supplied to each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20. This controls the drive (light emission) of the light-emitting element group that constitutes each system.
The motor driver 343 controls the output of excitation signals (driving currents) to the various motors 23 (motors 23 that constitute the various movable body units) arranged in the front frame unit 4 in accordance with the motor driving data input from the motor controller 317b.
At this time, the motor drive data specifies the output value of each motor 23 disposed in the front frame unit 4. Then, an excitation signal (drive current) corresponding to the output value specified in the motor drive data is supplied to each motor 23. In this way, the drive of each motor 23 is controlled.
The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 receives detection signals from the various sensors 24 and detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 341 then converts the detection signals from the various sensors 24 and the detection signals from the various switches 25 to 29 into serial data and outputs the serial data to the serial communication controller 317.

(Configuration of digital amplifier 305)
Next, the configuration of the digital amplifier 305 will be described.
The digital amplifier 305 converts the audio data (digital signal) input from the sound circuit 323 into an analog signal, amplifies it, and outputs it to the various speakers 22 (upper left speaker, upper right speaker, center left speaker, center right speaker, and woofer). At this time, the digital amplifier 305 performs frequency correction, volume correction, etc. for each channel (channel 1 to channel 8).
In particular, the digital amplifier 305 has a built-in DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The digital amplifier 305 can set a 10-band (frequency band) PEQ (Parametric Equalizer), a 3-band (frequency band) DRC (Dynamic Range Controller), a crossover filter, a bass boost function, and the like for each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) by transmitting a frequency correction parameter from the CPU 310 to the digital amplifier 305.

Specifically, the digital amplifier 305 is configured to include four CPU cores (core 1 to core 4). Core 1 performs frequency correction, volume correction, etc. on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker). Core 2 performs frequency correction, volume correction, etc. on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker). Core 3 performs frequency correction, volume correction, etc. on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer). Core 4 is unused.
The digital amplifier 305 is also provided with a frequency correction parameter setting register in which a frequency correction parameter is set (stored). The digital amplifier 305 executes frequency correction for the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) in accordance with the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting register.
In this embodiment, the frequency correction parameter setting register includes a frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 corresponding to core 1 (channels 1 and 2), a frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 corresponding to core 2 (channels 3 and 4), and a frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 corresponding to core 3 (channels 5 and 6).
Then, core 1 performs frequency correction on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) according to the frequency correction parameters set in frequency correction parameter setting unit 1. Core 2 performs frequency correction on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) according to the frequency correction parameters set in frequency correction parameter setting unit 2. Furthermore, core 3 performs frequency correction on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) according to the frequency correction parameters set in frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.

(Control of digital amplifier 305 by CPU 310)
Next, the control of the digital amplifier 305 by the CPU 310 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing types of frequency correction parameters.
The control ROM 302 stores frequency correction parameters.
The “frequency correction parameter” is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction that the digital amplifier 305 executes.
As described later, the CPU 310 transmits the frequency correction parameters to the digital amplifier 305 via the serial communication controller 317. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the frequency correction parameters received from the CPU 310 are set in a frequency correction parameter setting register, and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of each channel according to the frequency correction parameters set in the frequency correction parameter setting register.
As shown in Fig. 53, in this embodiment, four types of frequency correction parameters with different frequency correction contents (specifically, "normal frequency correction parameter", "jackpot frequency correction parameter", "time-saving frequency correction parameter", and "inspection frequency correction parameter") are defined as types of frequency correction parameters. In addition, the "normal frequency correction parameter", "jackpot frequency correction parameter", "time-saving frequency correction parameter", and "inspection frequency correction parameter" are stored in the control ROM 302.

The "normal frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the occurrence of a normal gaming state. In other words, the "normal frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the occurrence of the normal gaming state.
The "normal gaming state" is a gaming state in which a jackpot gaming state has not occurred and time-saving control has been stopped.
In particular, in the "normal frequency correction parameters", the contents of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) are specified (defined) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized).
The “normal frequency correction parameters” include a “normal frequency correction parameter 1” corresponding to core 1, a “normal frequency correction parameter 2” corresponding to core 2, and a “normal frequency correction parameter 3” corresponding to core 3.

The "normal frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "normal frequency correction parameter 1" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal (cut) of the bass. As a result, when the "normal frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker).
The "normal frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "normal frequency correction parameter 2" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "normal frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker).
The "normal frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "normal frequency correction parameter 3" specifies emphasis of the bass range and removal of the treble and midrange. As a result, when the "normal frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the bass range is emphasized and the treble and midrange are removed for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer).

The "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. In other words, the "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction that the digital amplifier 305 executes during the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state.
In particular, the "jackpot frequency correction parameters" specify (prescribe) the content of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized).
The "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot" is composed of a "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot" corresponding to core 1, a "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot" corresponding to core 2, and a "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" corresponding to core 3.

The "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the sound data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the sound data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker).
The "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the sound data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the sound data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker).
The "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the sound data of channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" specifies emphasis of the low-frequency range and removal of the high-frequency range and the mid-frequency range. As a result, when the "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the low-frequency range is emphasized and the high-frequency range and the mid-frequency range are removed for the sound data of channel 5 (woofer).

The "time-saving frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter corresponding to the execution of the time-saving control. In other words, the "time-saving frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction executed by the digital amplifier 305 during the execution of the time-saving control.
In particular, in the "time-saving frequency correction parameters", the contents of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) are specified (defined) according to the frequency characteristics of each speaker (so that the frequency characteristics of each speaker are utilized).
The “time-saving/frequency correction parameters” include a “time-saving/frequency correction parameter 1” corresponding to core 1, a “time-saving/frequency correction parameter 2” corresponding to core 2, and a “time-saving/frequency correction parameter 3” corresponding to core 3.

The "time-saving frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 1" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker).
The "time-saving frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 2" specifies the emphasis of the treble and midrange, and the removal of the bass. As a result, when the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, the treble and midrange are emphasized and the bass is removed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker).
The "time-saving frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 3" specifies emphasis of the bass range and removal of the treble and midrange. As a result, when the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, the bass range is emphasized and the treble and midrange are removed for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer).

The "inspection-time frequency correction parameter" is a frequency correction parameter that corresponds to the execution of the operation check process described later. In other words, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction that the digital amplifier 305 executes during the operation check process.
In particular, the "normal frequency correction parameters" specify (prescribe) the content of frequency correction for each channel (each speaker) regardless of the frequency characteristics of each speaker. In this embodiment, the "test frequency correction parameters" are information that specifies that frequency correction is not to be performed for all channels (all speakers).
The “inspection-time frequency correction parameters” include an “inspection-time frequency correction parameter 1” corresponding to core 1, an “inspection-time frequency correction parameter 2” corresponding to core 2, and an “inspection-time frequency correction parameter 3” corresponding to core 3.

The "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 1" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) by the core 1. Specifically, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 1" specifies that correction is not to be performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction is not performed for the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker).
The "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 2" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker) by the core 2. Specifically, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 2" specifies that correction is not to be performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, frequency correction is not performed for the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (left center speaker and right center speaker).
The "inspection frequency correction parameter 3" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) by the core 3. Specifically, the "inspection frequency correction parameter 3" specifies that correction is not to be performed (no correction) for all frequency bands. As a result, when the "inspection frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3, frequency correction is not performed for the audio data of channel 5 (woofer).

The DRAM 304 is provided with a frequency correction parameter number setting area 1, a frequency correction parameter number setting area 2, and a frequency correction parameter number setting area 3.
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1, information specifying the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 (hereinafter referred to as "frequency correction parameter number") is set (stored).
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2, information (frequency correction parameter number) specifying the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 is set (stored).
In the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3, information (frequency correction parameter number) specifying the type of the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 is set (stored).
In this embodiment, the frequency correction parameter numbers are specified as follows: a value that designates a "normal frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "0"), a value that designates a "jackpot frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "1"), a value that designates a "time-saving frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "2"), and a value that designates a "test frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "3").
In each of the frequency correction parameter number setting areas (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3), one of the values "0" to "3" is set.

The control ROM 302 also stores a post-effector frequency correction parameter.
The “post-effector frequency correction parameter” is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction that the post-effector 360 executes.
In this embodiment, two types of post-effector frequency correction parameters having different contents of frequency correction (specifically, a "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" and a "test post-effector frequency correction parameter") are defined as types of post-effector frequency correction parameters. The "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" and the "test post-effector frequency correction parameter" are stored in the control ROM 302.
The "normal state post-effector frequency correction parameter" is a post-effector frequency correction parameter that corresponds to the time during gameplay. In other words, the "normal state post-effector frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of frequency correction that the post-effector 360 executes during gameplay. In particular, the "normal state post-effector frequency correction parameter" specifies that a predetermined frequency correction is executed for the sound data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8).
The "test-time post-effector frequency correction parameter" is a post-effector frequency correction parameter that corresponds to the execution of the operation check process described later. That is, the "test-time post-effector frequency correction parameter" is information that specifies the content of the frequency correction that the post-effector 360 executes during the operation check process. In particular, the "test-time post-effector frequency correction parameter" specifies that frequency correction is not executed for the audio data of all channels (channels 1 to 8).

The sound circuit 323 is provided with a post-effector frequency correction parameter number register in which a post-effector frequency correction number is set. In the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, one of a value (specifically, "0") designating a "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" and a value (specifically, "1") designating a "test post-effector frequency correction parameter" is set.
Then, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction by referring to the post-effector frequency correction parameter stored in the control ROM 302 according to the value set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register.
Specifically, when "0" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction according to the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" stored in the control ROM 302. On the other hand, when "1" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register, the post-effector 360 executes frequency correction according to the "test post-effector frequency correction parameter" stored in the control ROM 302.

(Setting the frequency correction parameter during play)
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 310 initializes the values of the frequency correction parameter number setting areas (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 in an initial setting process (step S28-1) included in a sub-CPU initialization process described later. As a result, a value (specifically, "0") designating a "normal frequency correction parameter" is set in each frequency correction parameter number setting area.
Furthermore, in the initial setting process (step S28-1), the CPU 310 initializes the value of the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, a value (specifically, "0") designating the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register.
As a result, the post-effector 360 thereafter executes frequency correction on the audio data of each channel in accordance with the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameters".

In addition, in the digital amplifier setting process (step S28-4), the CPU 310 transmits a reset signal to the digital amplifier 305, and then transmits the "normal frequency correction parameters"("normal frequency correction parameter 1" to "normal frequency correction parameter 3") to the digital amplifier 305.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), registers related to volume setting (correction), registers related to terminal setting, status information setting register, etc.) are initialized (cleared), and then a "normal frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register. That is, a "normal frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "normal frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "normal frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is then performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 1", frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 2", and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 3".

In addition, at the start of a jackpot game state, the CPU 310 sets a value (specifically, "1") designating a "jackpot frequency correction parameter" in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304.
In addition, the CPU 310 transmits the “jackpot frequency correction parameters” (the “jackpot frequency correction parameter 1” to the “jackpot frequency correction parameter 3”) to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, a "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, a "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "frequency correction parameter at the time of a jackpot 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with the ``jackpot frequency correction parameter 1'', frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with the ``jackpot frequency correction parameter 2'', and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with the ``jackpot frequency correction parameter 3''.

In addition, if the CPU 310 does not start time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state, at the end of the jackpot game state, it sets a value specifying the "normal frequency correction parameter" (specifically, "0") in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 transmits the “normal frequency correction parameters” (“normal frequency correction parameter 1” to “normal frequency correction parameter 3”) to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, a "normal state frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "normal state frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is then performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 1", frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 2", and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 3".

On the other hand, when the CPU 310 starts time-saving control in response to the end of a jackpot gaming state, it sets a value (specifically, "2") specifying the "time-saving frequency correction parameter" in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 at the end of the jackpot gaming state.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 transmits the “time-saving/frequency correction parameters” (“time-saving/frequency correction parameters 1” to “time-saving/frequency correction parameters 3”) to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, a "time-saving/frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, a "time-saving/frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "time-saving/frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "time-saving/frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 1," frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 2," and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with the "time-saving frequency correction parameter 3."

In addition, when the time-saving control ends (when the number of time-saving operations has been exhausted), the CPU 310 sets a value (specifically, "0") designating the "normal frequency correction parameter" in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304.
Furthermore, the CPU 310 transmits the “normal frequency correction parameters” (“normal frequency correction parameter 1” to “normal frequency correction parameter 3”) to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, a "normal state frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "normal state frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is then performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 1", frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 2", and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 3".

As described above, during a normal game state, the post-effector 360 performs frequency correction of the sound data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter", and the digital amplifier 305 performs frequency correction of the sound data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "normal frequency correction parameter".
On the other hand, during a jackpot game state, the post-effector 360 performs frequency correction of the sound data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter", and the digital amplifier 305 performs frequency correction of the sound data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "jackpot frequency correction parameter".
On the other hand, while the time-saving control is being executed, the post-effector 360 performs frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "normal-time post-effector frequency correction parameter", and the digital amplifier 305 performs frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "time-saving-time frequency correction parameter".
In particular, the "normal frequency correction parameter", "big win frequency correction parameter" and "time-saving frequency correction parameter" specify the content of frequency correction so that sound data that matches the frequency characteristics of the speaker connected to each channel is generated. This makes it possible to bring out the characteristics of each speaker and improve the presentation effect of the sound presentation.

Here, in the digital amplifier 305, when the frequency correction parameters set in the frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting units 1 to 3) are changed, the volume of the corresponding channel is corrected to “0” (mute/silence) and then the frequency correction parameters are changed.
Specifically, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1 is changed, the volume is set to "0" for channels 1 and 2, and then the frequency correction parameter is changed. After the frequency correction parameter is changed, the volume for channels 1 and 2 is restored to the original volume.
On the other hand, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2 is changed, the volume is set to "0" for channels 3 and 4, and then the frequency correction parameter is changed. After the frequency correction parameter is changed, the volume for channels 3 and 4 is restored to the original volume.
On the other hand, when the frequency correction parameter set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3 is changed, the volume is set to "0" for channels 5 and 6, and then the frequency correction parameter is changed. After the frequency correction parameter is changed, the volume for channels 5 and 6 is restored to the original volume.

(Setting of frequency correction parameters when performing operation check process)
The main control board 200 is provided with an inspection terminal (not shown) to which an inspection device can be connected. By operating the inspection device connected to the inspection terminal, it is possible to transmit a predetermined inspection command from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300.
When the CPU 310 receives a predetermined test command, it executes a speaker test process.
In the speaker inspection process, first, a value specifying the "frequency correction parameter at inspection time" (specifically, "3") is set in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter setting area 3) of the DRAM 304.
Also, in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register of the sound circuit 323, a value (specifically, "1") designating the "test-time post-effector frequency correction parameter" is set.
As a result, the post-effector 360 thereafter performs frequency correction on the audio data of each channel in accordance with the "test-time post-effector frequency correction parameters".

Furthermore, the “test-time frequency correction parameters” (“test-time frequency correction parameter 1” to “test-time frequency correction parameter 3”) are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the "inspection-time frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with the "inspection time frequency correction parameter 1", frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with the "inspection time frequency correction parameter 2", and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with the "inspection time frequency correction parameter 3".

In the speaker inspection process, next, an operation check process is executed.
In the operation check process, predetermined test sounds (sound effects, voice, etc.) are output from each speaker in a predetermined order for the upper left speaker, upper right speaker, center left speaker, center right speaker, and woofer. This allows the inspector to check (check the operation) whether the speaker is operating normally based on the test sounds output from each speaker.
In this embodiment, the speaker inspection process (operation confirmation process) is terminated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.
Here, if the test sounds output from each speaker are subjected to the same frequency correction as during gameplay, the inspector may not be able to hear the test sounds. For example, if test sounds in the treble to midrange frequency bands are output from each speaker, and frequency correction is performed on the test sound output from the woofer to remove the treble and midrange frequencies, the inspector may not be able to hear the test sound output from the woofer.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, while the operation confirmation process of the speaker 22 is being executed, the post-effector 360 controls the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "inspection-time post-effector frequency correction parameters", and the digital amplifier 305 controls the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel (channel 1 to channel 8) based on the "inspection-time frequency correction parameters".
In particular, the "test time post-effector frequency correction parameters" are regulated so that frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is not performed (the audio data is passed through). Also, the contents of the "test time frequency correction parameters" are regulated so that frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is not performed (the audio data is passed through).
As a result, during the processing for checking the operation of the speaker 22, the sound circuit 323 and the digital amplifier 305 do not perform frequency correction on the audio data of all channels.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the inspector is unable to hear the test sounds output from the speakers 22.

Here, there is a risk that each speaker may be damaged if a sound in a frequency band that does not match the frequency characteristics of that speaker is output at a high volume.
Therefore, in the digital amplifier 305, during the period when the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is controlled based on the "inspection frequency correction parameter", the volume (gain) of each channel may be suppressed (reduced) compared to the period when the frequency correction of the audio data of each channel is controlled based on the "normal frequency correction parameter", "jackpot frequency correction parameter" or "time-saving frequency correction parameter".
For example, in the speaker inspection process, the "inspection volume correction parameter" may be sent to the digital amplifier 305 together with the "inspection frequency correction parameter", and during the operation check process, the digital amplifier 305 may control the volume of each channel according to the "inspection volume correction parameter". In this case, the "inspection volume correction parameter" specifies a lower volume for each channel compared to during play (when the "normal frequency correction parameter", "jackpot frequency correction parameter", or "time-saving frequency correction parameter" is set).

(Digital amplifier reset processing)
Next, the digital amplifier reset process will be described.
The digital amplifier 305 is provided with a status information setting register in which status information is set. Here, the "status information" is information that indicates the state of the digital amplifier 305.
The digital amplifier 305 is also capable of detecting the occurrence of various abnormal states, such as the occurrence of an overcurrent, a high temperature state, a state in which the duty ratio (τ) is maintained at an abnormal level, etc. When various abnormal states are not detected, a value corresponding to a normal state (specifically, "0") is set in the status information setting register, and in response to the detection of various abnormal information, a value corresponding to an abnormal state (specifically, "1") is set in the status information setting register.
Furthermore, in a status information acquisition process (step S28-8) described later, the CPU 310 acquires the status information set in the status information setting register of the digital amplifier 305. Then, when it is determined that the acquired status information is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (specifically, "1"), the CPU 310 executes a digital amplifier reset process (step S28-10) described later.
In the digital amplifier reset process, a reset signal is sent to the digital amplifier 305 (a signal input to a reset terminal is set to an ON state). Then, when the digital amplifier 305 receives the reset signal, it initializes various registers. Specifically, it initializes (clears) the frequency correction parameter setting register (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3), the register related to the volume setting (correction), the register related to the terminal setting, the status information setting register, and the like. As a result, a value corresponding to a normal state (specifically, "0") is set in the status information setting register.

Here, when a reset signal is sent to the digital amplifier 305 while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3) are initialized, and the sound quality of the sound output from the speaker 22 changes before and after the reset signal is sent, which may give the player a strange feeling.
Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, after a reset signal is sent to the digital amplifier 305, the information set in the frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and frequency correction parameter setting unit 3) is restored to the information before the reset signal was sent (before the occurrence of an abnormal state was detected in the digital amplifier 305).
That is, after executing the digital amplifier reset process, the CPU 310 executes the parameter restoration process (step S28-11).
In the parameter recovery process, first, the values of the frequency correction parameter number setting areas (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3) of the DRAM 304 are confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameters corresponding to the values of each frequency correction parameter number setting area are read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameters are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.

Specifically, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "0", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "0", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "0", the "normal state frequency correction parameter 1", the "normal state frequency correction parameter 2", and the "normal state frequency correction parameter 3" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "normal state frequency correction parameter 1" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "normal state frequency correction parameter 2" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the "normal state frequency correction parameter 3" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "1", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "1", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "1", the "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot", the "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot", and the "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "frequency correction parameter 1 at the time of a jackpot" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "frequency correction parameter 2 at the time of a jackpot" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the "frequency correction parameter 3 at the time of a jackpot" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "2", the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "2", and the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "2", the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 1", the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 2", and the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 3" are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305. As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 1" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 2" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and the "time-shortening-time-frequency correction parameter 3" is restored to the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.

As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, even if the digital amplifier 305 is initialized (reset) while the power is being applied to the performance control board 300, the quality of the sound output from the speaker 22 does not change before and after the digital amplifier 305 is initialized. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable.
Here, if an abnormal condition occurs in the digital amplifier 305 while the power is being applied to the pachinko machine 1, as described above, the initialization/recovery process is not performed on the performance control board 300, and the initialization/recovery process (steps S28-10, S28-11) is performed only on the digital amplifier 305.
On the other hand, if an abnormal condition occurs in the performance control board 300 while the power is being turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again, and an initialization/recovery process (step S28-1) is performed on the performance control board 300, and an initialization/recovery process (step S28-4) is performed on the digital amplifier 305. As a result, various memories for controlling the performance in the performance control board 300 (values in the frequency correction parameter number setting area, values in the setting value storage area, values in the flag area indicating the execution status of the time-saving control, values in the flag area indicating the performance mode, etc.) are initialized (values before the occurrence of the abnormal condition are deleted and the initial values are set again).

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six gaming machine states are defined (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state).
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a state of the gaming machine in which game progress is possible.
During the playable state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is permitted, which allows the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
During the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Also, information related to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the setting change state occurs.
During the setting change state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is turned to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a setting abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from a RAM abnormality, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power off and power on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery) (the probability of winning the jackpot game state). In this embodiment, the set value is specified to be a value of "0" to "5".
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a set value area. In the set value area, any one of values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. In the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value is, in order from highest to lowest, the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "5", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "4", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "3", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "2", the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "1", and the winning probability corresponding to a setting value of "0" (high winning probability → low winning probability).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area during the setting change state. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game center where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
When the setting change state occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced with a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is finalized.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state occurs, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state occurs (specifically, while a special low probability state occurs and while time-saving control is stopped).
During the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the first start port 51, the second start port 52, and the other prize entry ports 54 to 57). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of paid out balls to the number of out balls.
In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. As the predetermined interval, a interval is defined in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval is started in response to the end of the previous interval, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaching the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.

Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. An "out ball" refers to a game ball that has been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, an out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the outlet 58 may be regarded as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the outlet 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the first starting hole 51, the second starting hole 52 and the other winning holes 54 to 57.

(About the various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a normal symbol lottery is executed when a game ball passes through the start gate 41. If the normal symbol lottery is won, a normal symbol winning game state is generated. In the normal symbol winning game state, the normal electric role 52a is displaced (opened) from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second start gate 52.
In this embodiment, one type of normal symbol winning game state that occurs when the normal symbol lottery is won is set to "normal symbol winning".

When the "regular winning" is won (the regular pattern lottery is won), the regular pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the regular pattern at the "regular winning pattern".
On the other hand, if the player loses the regular symbol lottery, the regular symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the regular symbol as a "losing symbol."
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During execution of the time-saving control, the time for displaying the variable special symbols (hereinafter referred to as "variable time") is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. In this embodiment, during execution of the time-saving control, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is improved and the time for displaying the variable normal symbols is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. Also, during execution of the time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a is opened is increased and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a is extended in the normal winning game state compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.

When a "normal win" is won, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 1 or 3, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.5 or 2.0 seconds. During time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 3, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 2.0 seconds. During time-saving control, the number of times the normal electric device 52a opens is set to 1, and the opening time of the normal electric device 52a each time is set to 0.5 seconds.

In the pachinko machine 1, the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 51 triggers the execution of a first special symbol lottery, and the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 52 triggers the execution of a second special symbol lottery. If the first or second special symbol lottery is won, a big win game state is generated. In the big win game state, a round game is executed in which the special electric device 53a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the big win hole 53.
In this embodiment, "Jackpot 1" and "Jackpot 2" are set as the types of jackpot game states that arise when the first special pattern lottery is won, and "Jackpot 3" to "Jackpot 6" are set as the types of jackpot game states that arise when the second special pattern lottery is won.

When "jackpot 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 1 pattern" is displayed on the special pattern 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "variable pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "probable bonus pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same odd numbers, such as "7, 7, 7," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "Big Win 2" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 2 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 1 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "normal pattern" is stopped and displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "normal pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "2, 2, 2," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When "Big Win 3" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 3 pattern" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Probable Variable Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
When "Big Win 4" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 4 pattern" is displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Probable Variable Pattern" is displayed on the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
When the "jackpot 5" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot 5 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "latent pattern" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.
Here, the "latent pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a combination having a predetermined regularity, such as "1, 2, 3," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "Big Win 6" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "Big Win 6 pattern" is stopped and displayed on the special chart 2 display device. Also, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "latent pattern" is stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display areas a1 to a4.

On the other hand, if the player loses the special symbol lottery (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in a stopped state on the special symbol 1 display device or the special symbol 2 display device. Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed in the performance symbol display areas a1 to a4.
Here, a "losing pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 has a combination of numbers, such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers indicated by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in at least one area and the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other areas, and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 has a predetermined color.

If any of "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 6" is won, a predetermined number of rounds of play will be played in the jackpot game state.
In this embodiment, if "jackpot 1", "jackpot 2", "jackpot 5" or "jackpot 6" is won, the number of rounds is set to 5. On the other hand, if "jackpot 3" is won, the number of rounds is set to 15. On the other hand, if "jackpot 4" is won, the number of rounds is set to 10.
When "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" are won, the maximum opening time of the special electric device 53a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment). Each round of play ends when one of the following conditions is met: the maximum opening time set has elapsed since the special electric device 53a was opened, or the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 53 in that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (10 [balls] in this embodiment).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a "special pattern low probability state" and a "special pattern high probability state" are defined as game states related to the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery).
During the occurrence of the "special pattern low probability state", the probability of winning the special pattern lottery is set to the first probability (hereinafter referred to as the "low probability").
During the occurrence of the "special symbol high probability state", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a second probability (hereinafter referred to as "high probability") that is higher than the first probability.
The main control board 200 sets the winning probability of each lottery so that the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery and the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery are synchronized. Here, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery refers to the probability of winning a "win"("jackpot1" to "jackpot 6") that causes a jackpot game state.
In particular, in pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning the special pattern lottery depends on the combination of the setting value set in the setting value area and the game state (special pattern low probability state or special pattern high probability state).

Specifically, when the setting value is "0" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/319.69. On the other hand, when the setting value is "0" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/32.13.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "1" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/312.08. On the other hand, when the setting value is "1" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/31.36.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "2" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/304.82. On the other hand, when the setting value is "2" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/30.62.

On the other hand, when the setting value is "3" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/297.89. On the other hand, when the setting value is "3" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/29.93.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "4" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/291.27. On the other hand, when the setting value is "4" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/29.26.
On the other hand, when the setting value is "5" and the "special pattern low probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/284.94. On the other hand, when the setting value is "5" and the "special pattern high probability state" occurs, the winning probability of the special pattern lottery (jackpot probability) is 1/28.62.

If "Jackpot 2" or "Jackpot 6" is won, a "special chart low probability state" will occur during the period from the end of the jackpot game state to the occurrence of the next jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if "jackpot 1" or "jackpot 3" to "jackpot 5" is won, a "special chart high probability state" is generated according to the end of the jackpot game state. In this embodiment, the "special chart high probability state" is started according to the end of the jackpot game state and is ended according to the start of the next jackpot game state (the end of the stop display of the "jackpot pattern").
In addition, the "special pattern high probability state" may be configured to start upon the end of a jackpot game state, and to end (the "special pattern low probability state" is generated) upon the number of special pattern lotteries executed during the occurrence of the "special pattern high probability state" reaching a predetermined number (e.g., 10,000 times).

In addition, if any of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 6" is won, time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends.
The time-saving control is initiated upon the end of the jackpot game state, and is terminated upon the establishment of one of the following conditions: the special pattern lottery has been won (the "jackpot pattern" has been displayed stationary), or the notification display of the special pattern (variable display and stationary display) has been executed a predetermined number of times to save time.
If "Jackpot 2" or "Jackpot 6" is won, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
On the other hand, if the player wins "Big Win 1" or "Big Win 3" to "Big Win 5," the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 is composed of one byte of high-order data indicating the type of control command and one byte of low-order data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper data and lower data to the performance control board 300 by serial communication. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a pattern type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game status designation command, a number of reserved balls designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, a third look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, a game status designation command, and the like.
The symbol type designation command is a command that designates the type of the stopping symbol (stopping symbol number). Specifically, the symbol type designation command designates one of the types of "miss symbol" and "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol". The symbol type designation command is transmitted at the start of the variable display of the special symbol. In this embodiment, the symbol type designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The fluctuation mode designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number). The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by designating the fluctuation mode number. The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (the aspect of the first half period of the fluctuation performance) of the special pattern fluctuation display (fluctuation performance).
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of fluctuation modes are set, each corresponding to a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation mode designation command designates one ("fluctuation mode m") of the m types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers).

The variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special pattern.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of fluctuation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates one ("fluctuation pattern n") of the n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are sent at the start of the variation display of the special pattern.

The stop command is a command that specifies the stop display of the special symbols (effect symbols z1 and z2). The stop command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbols.
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, as the game state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the special chart high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot pattern flag, and the value of the post-jackpot spin counter is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when a special gaming phase (described later) is changed, and the like.

The reserved number designation command is a command to designate the reserved number. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command designates that the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) has increased by "1", that the reserved number has decreased by "1", or the reserved number, etc.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot gaming state). The opening designation command designates the type of jackpot gaming state (type of "jackpot symbol"). Specifically, the opening designation command designates one type from "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol". The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (the start of the jackpot gaming state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round of play. The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round of play.
The round end command is a command that specifies the end of a round of play. The round end command is transmitted at the end of a round of play.
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period, and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.

The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of the stop symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol" and "jackpot 1 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol"). In this embodiment, the first look-ahead designation command is set to correspond to each of the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery.
The second read-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the second read-ahead designation command designates that the type of the variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). The second read-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command designates that the type of the fluctuation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) ("fluctuation pattern n"). The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-stroke error. The error designation command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is transmitted at the start of a customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after being powered on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.
The game status designation command is a command that designates the occurrence (start) or cancellation (end) of a playable state. The game status designation command is transmitted when a playable state occurs (start) and when a playable state is cancelled (end).

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 by serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM. Also, the dispensing control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of winning balls, etc., is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The number of prize balls designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n=1 to 15). The number of prize balls designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 are set to specify the occurrence and release of a payout error, the occurrence and release of a full tank error, the occurrence and release of a ball jam error, etc. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and release of various errors are detected.

(Processing Executed on Main Control Board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).

In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hard random number update process. Note that the hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generating circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process that transmits the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. Note that the control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, we will explain the game control process that the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 executes based on the program (software) stored in the ROM 220.

(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 7. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.

In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.
Specifically, the value set in the reception storage area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the RAM clear switch 207 has occurred. The determination result is then stored as switch information for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state has occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is stored as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state has not occurred, a value indicating that the ON state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is stored as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is occurring (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This starts measuring the set wait processing time by the timer counter.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.

In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, processes required for permitting access to the work area of the RAM 230 are executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. This allows the CPU 210 to access the RAM 230.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the area other than the setting value area and the game machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) is set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. If it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the on state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the on state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, and the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has not occurred, and the on state of the setting key switch 208 has occurred, and the on state of the inner frame open sensor 108 has occurred.
Here, in step S1-1, if the on state has not occurred for the inner frame open sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, if the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting check state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-14. In the setting check state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value check state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error related area, and the normal game related area 1) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-15, power recovery initialization processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16. In the power recovery initialization processing, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) for designating that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a subcommand output request buffer in the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process at power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process at power recovery, a dispensing command specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a dispensing command output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal or not. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to a playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an on state.
Here, as described above, when an on state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state occurs is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when an on state does not occur for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state does not occur is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stored in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) designating that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S1-30, a RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-9 or step S1-20 is cleared (initialized).
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value specification command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in an initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 7 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 8. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.), which are random numbers generated in a program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and processing according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer. The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers other than winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the save process at the time of power interruption.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power interruption detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in Fig. 9 during the interruption permitted period of the main loop process. The power cutoff save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power cutoff save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the power interruption save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stopping process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized, which stops the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for recovery determination.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, in which "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts a timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 10 during an interrupt permitted period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.
In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.

In step S4-4, a port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the state of each switch/sensor (each signal) is obtained.
The RAM 230 is provided with an input information storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), and an on state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor (each signal input to the input port 204) connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, first, for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3), the information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor is obtained, and the obtained information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
As a result, for each switch sensor, when a detection signal is input from that switch sensor (high level), a "1" is stored in the input information memory area corresponding to that switch sensor, and when a detection signal is not input from that switch sensor (low level), a "0" is stored in the input memory area corresponding to that switch sensor.

Next, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). At this time, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor based on the value stored in the input information storage area in the previous port input process and the value stored in the input information storage area in the current port input process.
The "on state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level).
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, a "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, a "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.
In particular, the input port 1 is provided with a receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal input from the launch enabling condition detection unit 422. Then, in the port input process, information set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal of the input port 1 is acquired, and the acquired information is saved (stored) in the input information memory area corresponding to the handle detection signal.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the gaming machine state flag stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each of the switches 101, 102, and 104. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special image display device and the operation of the special electric device 53a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric role object 52a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.

In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, the occurrence and release of various errors (abnormal states) are monitored. Then, when the occurrence and release of various errors is detected, various settings (setting of subcommands, etc.) are executed.
In addition, in the state management process, it is determined whether the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process). If it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from a state where it is not input to a state where it is input, a game status designation command that designates the occurrence of a state where it is possible to fire is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Furthermore, in the state management process, based on the value stored in the input information storage area corresponding to the handle detection signal (the value stored in the previous timer interrupt process and the value stored in the current timer interrupt process), it is determined whether the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state. Then, when it is determined that the handle detection signal has changed from an input state to an input state, a game status designation command that designates the release of the launch-enabled state is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-16, a prize-winning port switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the prize-winning port switch process, a process (such as updating various counters) is executed according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each of the switches 101 to 103, 105, and 106.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening 53 is stored, prize ball control counter 2 in which the number of game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 54 is stored, prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of game balls that have entered the upper left, middle left and lower left other prize openings 55 to 57 is stored, prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of game balls that have entered the first start opening 51 is stored, and prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of game balls that have entered the second start opening 52 is stored.
In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (15 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when a state is changed from one that designates the launch of the game ball to the left path to one that designates the launch of the game ball to the right path (such as when a big win game state starts), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1," and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the state changes from one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the right path to one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the left path (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (electronic device such as a hall computer or data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the out port, information on the occurrence of an error, etc.
The "symbol determination count information" is external information related to the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable display and stop display of special symbols) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination count information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the number of times the special symbol stop display is executed reaches a predetermined number.

The "start port information" is external information related to the entry of game balls into the start port 51, 52. Every time the CPU 210 detects the ON state of the detection signal input from the start port switch 101, 102, it outputs an external signal corresponding to the start port information to the hall computer (or a data display device).
The "jackpot information" is external information related to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. Each time a jackpot gaming state occurs, the main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or a data display device).
The "outlet payout information" is external information related to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer every time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the security timer value is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached the predetermined value, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information. As a result, the start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. This causes the jackpot information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the out ball count counter for external information. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to a playable state.
Then, if it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value corresponding to a playable state (determined to be a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, or a backup abnormal state), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is also cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".

Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the regular display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value of the regular display pattern counter is set as output data a.

Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 is a value that specifies any of the special game phases among "state before opening of large prize opening,""state of controlling opening of large prize opening,""state of enabling closing of large prize opening," and "state of waiting for completion of opening of large prize opening."
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is a value specifying one of the special game phases among "state before opening of large prize opening", "large prize opening opening control state", "large prize opening closure enabled state" and "large prize opening opening end waiting state", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of large prize pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area is not a value specifying any of the special game phases among "state before large prize opening,""large prize opening opening control state,""large prize opening closure enabled state," and "large prize opening end waiting state," output data b is not set.

Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically summing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a jackpot game state (type of jackpot game state), and LED 24 displays the path (left path or right path) along which the game ball should be shot.
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal pending number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.
Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power has been restored, the value set in the special chart high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when the power is restored (when a high probability state for special charts is occurring or when a low probability state for special charts is occurring), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the setting change display data setting process, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "- " is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display numbers indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and numbers indicating the set value are displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "E" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "r." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and a number indicating an error code is displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. Also, the solenoids 64, 65 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period when the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, information for testing (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, time-saving control execution state, probability state of special pattern lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the program returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restore process is terminated, the program returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.

In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. As a result, output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.
In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3") or not. If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.

In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6.
In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
That is, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In addition, in the common output process, output data of the launch permission signal is output to output port 1.
That is, first, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred (is set).
When it is determined that a playable state has occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a high level is output to the output port 1. As a result, the launch permission signal is output.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the playable state has not occurred, output data for setting the launch permission signal to a low level is output to the output port 1. This stops the output of the launch permission signal.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In this embodiment, the common output process is configured to set the output of the launch permission signal only when it is determined that a playable state has occurred. As a result, the launch permission signal is output only while a playable state is occurring (being set). However, the common output process may be configured to set the output of the launch permission signal regardless of the gaming machine state. With this configuration, the launch permission signal can be output at all times while the main control board 200 is powered on.

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4), which will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, it first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area of the discrimination segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, with regard to the RAM clear switch 207, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values (in this embodiment, "0").
In step S37-7, a set value save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value save process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and if the on state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an on state.
In step S37-9, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the sub-command setting process, a setting-related end command (sub-command) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a setting value specification command for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.
In step S37-11, a RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, a game-ready state is set as the gaming machine state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.
In addition, in the normal starting ball detection process, it is determined whether or not the game is in a right-hand hitting period. If it is determined that the game is not in a right-hand hitting period (it is in a left-hand hitting period), "1" is added to the value of the right-hand hitting error counter.
In this embodiment, the period during which one of the big win game state and the time-saving control is being executed is the right-hand hit period, while the period during which the normal game state (the game state during which the big win game state is not being executed and the time-saving control is stopped) is being executed is the left-hand hit period.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-4. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special chart 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 2 start port switch 102 has not been detected (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-6, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, the process first proceeds to step S6-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a normal symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, a regular map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the regular map reservation counter update process, the value set in the regular map reservation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the regular map reservation counter.

In step S6-4, a normal random number storage process is executed, and the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal game information.
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which regular game information during game play is stored, and a regular game information memory area in which regular game information for which a regular win/loss determination is pending is stored.
The regular game play information storage area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game play information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as follows, from highest priority to lowest priority: memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest). The regular game information stored in the regular game information storage area is subjected to regular game winning/losing judgment in order from the information stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored as normal game information in the normal game information storage area. At this time, the normal game information is stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "1", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "2", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "3", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the regular map reserved number counter is "4", the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in memory area 4.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for special chart 1.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in a special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), the value of the right-hit error counter is reset (the value of the right-hit error counter is set to "0").
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special chart 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in step S5-6 will be explained.
Figure 17 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-6, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the special pattern random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as a jackpot random number, a winning symbol random number, a reach group random number, a reach mode random number, and a variable pattern random number are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5) is proceeded to.
In step S9-5, a special reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special reserved number counter update process, the value set in the special reserved number counter (special reserved number counter 1 or special reserved number counter 2) specified by the address set in the reserved number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special reserved number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in a special game information storage area (special game information storage area or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230 as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2).
The RAM 230 is composed of a memory area 0 in which special chart game information during game execution is stored, a special chart 1 game information memory area in which special chart 1 game information for which start judgment is pending is stored, and a special chart 2 game information memory area in which start judgment is pending.
The special chart 1 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. Then, the special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.
The special chart 2 game information memory area is configured to include memory area 1 to memory area 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The priority of each memory area is specified as memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (higher to lower) in order of priority. The special game information stored in the special game information storage area is executed in order of priority from the memory area with the higher priority.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as the special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the storage area with the highest priority among the available storage areas.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols (reserved number of special symbols 1 or reserved number of special symbols 2) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special symbol drawing, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 1 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special symbol drawing, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special symbols 2 has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information storage area) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
In addition, for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed. Also, for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stoppage of time-saving control, a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed, and for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of time-saving control, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary judgment process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special pattern lottery ("jackpot" or "miss") is determined (pre-special pattern hit determination).
A special symbol winning/losing lottery table in which the jackpot value of the special symbol lottery is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the special symbol winning/losing lottery table, a special symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to each combination of the setting value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special symbol low probability state" or "special symbol high probability state") is stored.
Specifically, the special chart winning/losing lottery tables stored are a "setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," a "setting value 6 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table," and a "setting value 6 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table."

The "Setting value 0 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "0" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 0 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "204" are registered as the jackpot value out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535".
The "Setting value 0 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "0" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 0 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2039" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "1" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 1 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "209" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "1" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 1 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2089" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "2" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 2 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "214" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "2" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 2 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2139" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

The "Setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "3" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 3 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "219" are registered as the jackpot value out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535".
The "Setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "3" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 3 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2189" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "4" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 4 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "224" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "4" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 4 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2239" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "5" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0" (the "special chart low probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 5 low probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "229" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.
The "Setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table" is selected when the setting value is "5" and the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "1" (the "special chart high probability state" is occurring). In the "Setting value 5 high probability special chart winning/losing lottery table", "0" to "2289" out of the jackpot random numbers "0" to "65535" are registered as jackpot values.

In the pre-special winning judgment process, the value set in the setting value area (setting value) and the current game state ("special winning/losing probability state" or "special winning/losing probability state") are confirmed, and the special winning/losing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information and the special pattern win/lose lottery table that has been read, the result of the special pattern lottery ("jackpot" or "loss") is determined (pre-determination of special pattern win).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special pattern lottery table that has been read out, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that was read out (if it matches the losing value), the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "loser" (a loss).

In the advance determination process, next, advance special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (advance special symbol determination).
In the pre-special pattern determination process, if the pre-special pattern hit determination determines a "jackpot" (win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined (pre-special pattern determination).
A jackpot symbol selection table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of "jackpot symbol" is registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the jackpot symbol selection table, a first jackpot symbol selection table corresponding to the first special symbol selection and a second jackpot symbol selection table corresponding to the second special symbol selection are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot 1 symbol" and "jackpot 2 symbol" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols". On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 6 symbol" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols".
When the pre-determined game information is the special game information, the first jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the first jackpot symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, in the advance special pattern determination process, if the advance special pattern hit determination determines that the winning pattern is a "miss" (failed), the type of the stopping pattern is determined to be a "miss pattern" (advance special pattern determination).

In the advance determination process, next, a first read-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading designation command setting process, a first pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the preliminary judgment process, next, a preliminary special chart change mode judgment process is executed.
At this time, if the preliminary special chart hit judgment determines that the player has "lost" (lost the prize), the preliminary special chart change mode judgment process for when the player has lost the prize is executed, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the preliminary special chart hit judgment determines that the player has "won" (won the prize), the preliminary special chart change mode judgment process for when the player has won the prize is executed, which will be described later.

In the pre-selection process for determining the special chart variation pattern when a winner is not selected, a pre-selection random number type determination is first performed.
In the pre-random number type determination, it is determined whether the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is an "indefinite value" or a "fixed value."
Here, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is an "indeterminate value," the fluctuation mode number (primary fluctuation mode number) and the fluctuation pattern number are not determined when the game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
On the other hand, if the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is a "fixed value," the fluctuation mode number (primary fluctuation mode number) and the fluctuation pattern number are determined when the game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored) (when step S9-8 is executed).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Of the range of "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if the value of the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-selection special chart fluctuation mode determination process when losing, if the pre-selection random number type determination determines it to be a "fixed value", then pre-selection reach group determination, pre-selection fluctuation mode determination when losing, and pre-selection fluctuation pattern determination are further performed.
In addition, in the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process when losing, if the pre-random number type determination is determined to be an ``indeterminate value,'' the pre-reach group determination, the pre-fluctuation mode determination when losing, and the fluctuation pattern determination when losing are not executed.

In the advance reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
In addition, reach group determination tables corresponding to each combination of hold type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), hold number ("0" to "3"), and game state (low probability state, time-saving state, high probability state, or potential probability state) are stored.
Here, in this embodiment, the game states defined are a low probability state, a time-saving state, a probability change state, and a potential probability state.
The "low probability state" is a game state in which a special chart low probability state is occurring and time-saving control is stopped. The "time-saving state" is a game state in which a special chart low probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being executed. The "probability state" is a game state in which a special chart high probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being executed. The "latent probability state" is a game state in which a special chart high probability state is occurring and time-saving control is being stopped.
In the advance reach group determination, first, the reserved type (type of game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the number of reserved items, and the game status are confirmed, and the reach group determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out. At this time, the number of reserved items is assumed to be "0".
Then, the reach group number is determined based on the reach group random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-failure fluctuation mode determination, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined.
ROM 220 stores a fluctuation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and fluctuation mode numbers (types of fluctuation modes) is registered.
In addition, as the fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode determination table when losing and a fluctuation mode determination table when winning are stored.
Furthermore, as a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each reach group number (each type of reach group) is stored.
In particular, in each fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. This allows the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table to be selected simultaneously based on each fluctuation mode determination table.
In the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment when a winning ticket is lost, first, the reach group number judged by the preliminary reach group judgment is confirmed, and the fluctuation mode judgment table when a winning ticket is lost corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination when an election is lost, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between fluctuation pattern random numbers and fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) is registered.
In addition, a plurality of fluctuation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored as the fluctuation pattern determination table.
In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination when a candidate is rejected, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination when a candidate is rejected is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the process of determining the pre-selection special chart variation mode upon winning, first, a pre-selection variation mode determination is performed upon winning.
When a prize is won, the pre-fluctuating mode determination determines the fluctuating mode number (type of fluctuating mode).
In the pre-winning variation mode determination, first, the winning variation mode determination table is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the winning time fluctuation mode determination table that has been read, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the process of determining the pre-winning special chart variation mode, next, a pre-winning variation pattern determination is performed.
When determining the pre-variation pattern at the time of winning, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined.
In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In the advance judgment process, next, second and third read-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, if the preliminary special chart hit determination determines that the winning combination is a "miss" (lost), and the preliminary random number type determination determines that the combination is a "fixed value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode determination at the time of loss, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern determination at the time of loss are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the winning number is a "miss" (failed) and the preliminary random number type judgment determines that the winning number is an "undefined value," a second look-ahead specification command designating an "undefined value" and a third look-ahead specification command designating an "undefined value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that a "jackpot" (win) has occurred, a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the preliminary fluctuation mode judgment at the time of winning, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment at the time of winning are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

As a result of the above, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is a ``fixed value,'' the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are determined, and second and third pre-reading designation commands specifying the determined fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are sent to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is an ``indeterminate value,'' the fluctuation mode number and fluctuation pattern number are not determined, and the second and third pre-reading designation commands specifying an ``indeterminate value'' are sent to the performance control board 300.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases") of a game executed based on a special pattern lottery (hereinafter referred to as "special game") are defined: "state waiting for special pattern change,""state during special pattern change,""state displaying special pattern stopped by special pattern,""state before opening of large prize opening,""state controlling opening of large prize opening,""state enabling closure of large prize opening," and "state waiting for end of opening of large prize opening."
Then, in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven special game phases is set.
The ROM 220 also stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, which correspond to each special game phase.
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase) set in a special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S10-2, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (special game phase) acquired in step S10-1 is read out.
In step S10-3, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S10-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S10-1 is a value corresponding to the "special chart change waiting state", the special chart change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "special chart changing state", the special chart changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "special chart stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "pre-large prize opening state", the pre-large prize opening opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening opening control state", the large prize opening opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening closure valid state", the large prize opening closure valid process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "large prize opening opening end wait state", the large prize opening opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 20, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3.
In step S11-2, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process proceeds to step S11-16.

In step S11-3, a special drawing reservation number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-4. In the special drawing reservation number update process, the special drawing reservation number (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) is updated.
Specifically, in the special drawing reservation number update process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special drawing 2 reservation number counter is "1" or greater.
Then, if the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter is "1" or more, the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value ("1" in this embodiment) that designates a game based on the special pattern 2 game information, and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is not "1" or greater (the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is "0"), the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is set to a value designating a game based on the special chart 1 game information (in this embodiment, "0"), and "1" is subtracted from the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter.
In step S11-4, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-5. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number of special drawings has been decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Specifically, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 2 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 1 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-5, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information is stored is shifted.
Specifically, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 2 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the storage contents of storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted (moved) to storage area 0. Next, the storage contents of storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 1 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 2 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are shifted to storage area 3 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area. Next, the storage contents of storage area 4 of the special symbol 1 game information storage area are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-6, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6") or not.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormal state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-7).

In step S11-7, a special symbol winning determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the special symbol winning determination process, the result of the special symbol lottery is determined (special symbol winning determination).
In the special winning determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 and the current game state ("special winning/losing probability state" or "special winning/losing probability state") are confirmed, and the special winning/losing lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the special pattern win/lose lottery table that has been read out, it is determined whether the result of the special pattern lottery is a "jackpot" or not (special pattern win determination).
Specifically, if the value of the jackpot random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that has been read out, the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "jackpot" (win).
On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number included in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the jackpot value registered in the special pattern winning/losing lottery table that has been read out (if it matches the losing value), the result of the special pattern lottery is judged to be a "loser" (a loss).

In step S11-8, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special symbol pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination has determined that a "jackpot" (win) has occurred.
Then, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "0", the first big win symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the big win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the first big win symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is "1", the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is judged to be a "missing pattern."
Next, a value corresponding to the type of the determined stopping symbol is set in a special symbol determination flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-9, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-10, a special symbol stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, the stop pattern number of the special symbol is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop pattern number lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number value and the stop pattern number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as stop pattern number lottery tables, a winning stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is won, and a losing stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to when the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is lost are stored.
Furthermore, as winning time stop pattern number lottery tables, a winning time stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the first special pattern lottery and a winning time stop pattern number lottery table corresponding to the second special pattern lottery are stored.
In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
When the special symbol hit judgment determines that the player has won the jackpot (a big win), the special symbol discrimination flag setting value is checked, and a winning stop symbol number selection table corresponding to the result of the check is read out. Then, the stop symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the winning stop symbol number selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment results in a "loss" (loss), the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss is read out. Then, the stop pattern number is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of loss that has been read out.
Next, the determined stop symbol number is stored in a stop symbol number storage area of the RAM 230.

In step S11-11, a special symbol variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol variation pattern determination process, the variation mode (type of variation mode and type of variation pattern) of the special symbol is determined.
Specifically, in the special chart change pattern determination process, first, the result of the special chart hit determination is confirmed. Then, if the result of the special chart hit determination is "miss" (losing), the process of determining the special chart change state when the player loses is executed, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the result of the special chart hit determination is "big hit" (winning), the process of determining the special chart change state when the player wins is executed, which will be described later.

In the process of determining the special chart change mode when a winner is defeated, a reach group determination is first performed.
In the reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
In the reach group judgment, first, the reserved type (type of game information stored in memory area 0 (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the reserved number, and the game status are confirmed, and the reach group judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, the type of the reach group is determined based on the reach group random number included in the game information stored in the memory area 0 and the reach group determination table that has been read out.
In the process of determining the special chart variation mode when the player loses the election, a variation mode determination when the player loses the election is then performed.
When determining the fluctuation mode at the time of losing, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the loss-time variable mode judgment, first, the reach group number judged by the reach group judgment is confirmed, and the loss-time variable mode judgment table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart fluctuation mode when losing, next, a fluctuation pattern determination when losing is performed.
When determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of losing, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
In the case of determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the fluctuation mode determination when losing is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

On the other hand, in the process of determining the special chart variation mode when a prize is won, first, a variation mode determination is performed when a prize is won.
When determining the fluctuation mode at the time of winning, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern table are determined.
In the winning time variation mode determination, first, a winning time variation mode determination table is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the winning time fluctuation mode determination table that was read out, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the special chart variation mode when a prize is won, next, a variation pattern determination is performed when a prize is won.
When determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined.
In the winning time fluctuation pattern determination, first, the fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the winning time fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and the read fluctuation pattern determination table.

In step S11-12, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a fluctuation mode designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) determined in step S11-11 is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In addition, a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S11-11 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-13, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable time setting process, first, the variable time (hereinafter referred to as "variable time 1") corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S11-11 is obtained.
In addition, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation time 2") corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-11 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer.

In step S11-14, a special chart variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special chart variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special chart display timer.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 1 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, a segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 display counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 2 display counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 2 display counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-15, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S11-16, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the customer waiting setting process, a demonstration designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart change process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 21, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-3, and if it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S12-3, a special chart variable display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special chart variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special chart display device is updated.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data update process, when the first special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter is incremented by "1". On the other hand, when the second special pattern change display is being executed, the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter is incremented by "1".

In step S12-4, a special chart stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-5. In the special chart stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special chart display device is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number memory area of RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "0", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, when the special pattern discrimination flag setting value is "1", the acquired stop pattern number (data corresponding to the stop pattern number) is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop pattern number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-5, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-6. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer.
In step S12-6, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the stop command setting process, the stop command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. Also, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "special game stop pattern display state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special map stopped processing)
Next, the special chart stop processing executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 22, it first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is not a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the type of the stopped pattern is a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-6.
In step S13-3, it is determined whether or not time-saving control is being executed. If it is determined that time-saving control is being executed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-4. If it is determined that time-saving control is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S13-5.
Here, if "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230, it is determined that time-saving control is being executed, and if "0" is set, it is determined that time-saving control is not being executed.

In step S13-4, a time-saving control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the time-saving control management process, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving control.
Specifically, in the time-saving control management process, first, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value of the time-saving counter is set as a new value of the time-saving counter.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0".
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is "0", then the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0" (time-saving control is stopped).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0", the time-saving control flag area of RAM 230 remains set to "1" (the state in which time-saving control is being executed is maintained).
In step S13-5, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S13-6, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S13-7, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-8. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the special electric role 53a is set.
Special electric control tables corresponding to each type of "big win symbol" are stored in the ROM 220. Each special electric control table specifies the effective time for closing the big win opening, the closing time for the big win opening, the number of rounds of play, the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each round of play, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of “jackpot pattern” determined in step S11-8 is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the special electric role continuous operation number counter is set to "0".

In step S13-8, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-9. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer.
In step S13-9, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the opening command setting process, the opening command specifying the type of "jackpot symbol" determined in step S11-8 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
In step S13-10, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening pre-open state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing before opening the big prize hole)
Next, the pre-opening process of the big prize opening executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened.
When the pre-opening process for the large prize opening is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S14-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, the value set in the special electric role continuous operation counter is added with "1" and the new value is set in the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the sub-command output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
Next, the value of the special electric winning number counter is set to "0."
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening control state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 24, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the special electric role 53a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the special electric role solenoid 65 based on the set solenoid data, and the special electric role 53a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer.
In step S15-4, a special electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the special electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new value in the special electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Big prize opening control process)
Next, the special prize opening control process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening control process.
When the special prize opening control process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S16-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process (see FIG. 24) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning count counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the special electric role 53a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closing effective time setting process, a special prize opening closing effective time (interval time) is set in the special game timer by referring to the special prize opening closing effective time table set in the special prize opening closing effective time table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure valid state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Large prize winning hole closure effective processing)
Next, the big prize opening closing validity process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process.
When the special prize opening closure activation process is executed in step S10-3, the process first proceeds to step S17-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a judgment.
In step S17-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in the special game timer by referring to the special prize opening control table set in the special prize opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening pre-open state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening end waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Wait processing for the end of the large prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for finishing opening the big prize opening, which is executed in step S10-3, will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening.
When the waiting process for the completion of the large prize opening is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S18-1.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2, and if it is determined that the value of the special game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S18-2, a game status setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game status setting process, a game status is set.
Specifically, in the game state setting process, the value of the special symbol high probability state flag in RAM 230 is set according to the type of stopping symbol (jackpot symbol).
At this time, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 1 symbol" or "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 5 symbol", "1" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. On the other hand, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 2 symbol" or "jackpot 6 symbol", "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a predetermined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter. At this time, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 2 symbol" or "jackpot 6 symbol", the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 100 [times]. On the other hand, if the type of the stopped symbol is "jackpot 1 symbol" or "jackpot 3 symbol" to "jackpot 5 symbol", the predetermined number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 [times]. Also, "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230.
Next, a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol is set in the previous jackpot symbol flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "special game phase change waiting state" is set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
Here, in this embodiment, seven situations/stages (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phases") of a game executed based on a normal symbol lottery (hereinafter referred to as "normal game") are defined: "normal symbol change waiting state", "normal symbol changing state", "normal symbol stopped symbol display state", "normal symbol electric device pre-opening state", "normal symbol electric device opening control state", "normal symbol electric device closure active state" and "normal symbol electric device opening end waiting state".
Then, in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the seven normal game phases is set.
In addition, the ROM 220 stores normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) normal games, which correspond to each normal game phase.
In the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S19-1.
In step S19-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase) set in a normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S19-2, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S19-3. In the normal game control module acquisition process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S19-1 is read out.

In step S19-3, a normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read in step S19-2 is started.
Specifically, if the value acquired in step S19-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal map stopped pattern display state", the normal map stopped process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control process described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective process described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait process described below is started.

(Waiting for normal chart changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map.
When the map change waiting process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 29, the process first proceeds to step S20-1.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map pending number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map pending number counter.
Next, the memory area in which the regular game information is stored is shifted. Specifically, the memory contents of memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 1 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 2 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are shifted to memory area 3 of the regular game information memory area. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 of the regular game information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination).
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table.
In the normal lottery table corresponding to the time-saving control being stopped, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is a first probability (1/99 in this embodiment). On the other hand, in the normal lottery table corresponding to the time-saving control being executed, the winning value is registered so that the winning probability is a second probability (1/1 in this embodiment) higher than the first probability.
In the normal winning/losing determination process, a normal winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 and a normal winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control.
Specifically, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 matches the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "win" (a prize).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number contained in the game information stored in memory area 0 does not match the winning value, the result of the normal pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (lost).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal winning/losing determination process, if the normal winning/losing determination determines that the winning symbol is a "win" (a prize), the type of the winning symbol (winning symbol number) is determined to be a "normal winning symbol."
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "lose" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "losing pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal pattern variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of the normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time-saving control is stopped, the type of normal map fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined to be the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 2.0 [s]).
On the other hand, when time-saving control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is determined as the type (fluctuation pattern number) of the normal fluctuation pattern.

In step S20-6, a normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, a variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. The obtained variable time is then set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the general map change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the general map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. This controls the lighting of the segments corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device.
Next, a predetermined segment data is set as the segment data corresponding to the general map display device. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the general map display device, the segments corresponding to the set segment data are controlled to be lit.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game phase changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the process during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 30, the process first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S21-3, a process for updating the data for displaying the change in the map is executed, and the process is terminated to move to the next process (step S4-15). In the process for updating the data for displaying the change in the map, the data for controlling the change in the map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map variation display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the regular map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol memory area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal stop symbol display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Processing during normal map suspension)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S22-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 52a is set.
A normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (executing or stopped) of the time-saving control is stored in the ROM 220. Each normal electric control table specifies the time before the normal electric open, the effective time for closing the normal electric, the waiting time for the end of the open, the number of times of opening and closing, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) corresponding to each opening and closing.
In the ordinary electric control data setting process, an ordinary electric control table corresponding to the execution status (ongoing or stopped) of the time-saving control is read out, and the read ordinary electric control table is set in the ordinary electric control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the number of times of switching is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of times of switching is read and set in the normal electric role switching number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory pre-opening state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Pre-processing for opening normal electric devices)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 32 is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric parts.
When the normal electric feature opening pre-processing is executed in step S19-3, the process first proceeds to step S23-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process of steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 33, the process first proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 52a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 52a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S23-3 or S25-4). In the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, a value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter is set as a new normal electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Normal electric feature release control process)
Next, the normal electric feature release control process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process.
When the normal electric feature release control process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 34, it first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-3. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process (see FIG. 33) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, a normal electric component opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric component opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric component 52a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory closing valid state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric feature closure validity process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 35, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric accessory release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening end wait process executed in step S19-3 will be described.
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the opening of normal electric gimmicks.
When the normal electric feature release end wait process is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to a "normal game phase change waiting state" is set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total-out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is being reached, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is being reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not being reached (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which a "special chart low probability state" has occurred, the time-saving control is stopped, and a jackpot gaming state has not occurred.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "3", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 2 start port switch 102 is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "10", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the right other winning opening 54. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "10", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the left other prize entry ports 55 to 57. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left prize entry port switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached a reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n=integer), where “n” is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to “1”.
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.
In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal winning ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio is to be displayed, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.

(Hold performance)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a hold effect is executed for each piece of game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information storage area).
The hold effect is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (start determination) of a special pattern based on the game information that is the subject of the hold effect (hereinafter referred to as ``hold effect subject game information'') is on hold, or that the notification display of a special pattern based on the hold effect subject game information is currently being executed.
In the reserved effect, a reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved symbol display areas b1 to b3.

Specifically, in the reserved pattern display area b2, display positions (display sections) at which the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the four memory areas (memory area 1 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 1 game information memory area.
In addition, in the reserved pattern display area b3, display positions (display sections) where the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the four memory areas (memory area 1 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 2 game information memory area.
In a reserved performance in which the special chart 1 game information is set as the target game information for the reserved performance, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the target game information for the reserved performance is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas b1 and b2.

In other words, during the period when the reserved performance target game information is stored in the special chart 1 game information memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) (the period from after the reserved performance target game information is acquired to before start determination is made based on the reserved performance target game information), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the reserved performance target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the pending performance target game information is stored in memory area 0 (the period from after a start determination based on the pending performance target game information is executed to the end of the notification display of a special pattern based on the pending performance target game information), a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending pattern display area b1.
On the other hand, in a reserved performance in which the special chart 2 game information is the reserved performance target game information, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas b1 and b3.
In other words, during the period when the reserved performance target game information is stored in the special chart 2 game information memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) (the period from after the reserved performance target game information is acquired to before a start determination is made based on the reserved performance target game information), a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b3.
At this time, the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the reserved performance target game information is stored.
On the other hand, during the period when the pending performance target game information is stored in memory area 0 (the period from after a start determination based on the pending performance target game information is executed to the end of the notification display of a special pattern based on the pending performance target game information), a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in the pending pattern display area b1.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special chart 1 game information in memory area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area, and when a pending performance targeting the special chart 1 game information is executed, upon start of the pending performance, a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed at a display position corresponding to the memory area 3 of the pending pattern display area b2.
Thereafter, in response to the shifting of the memory area for storing the game information subject to the reserved performance from memory area 3 to memory area 2, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, in response to the memory area for storing the game information subject to pending performance being shifted from memory area 2 to memory area 1, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to pending performance is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
Furthermore, in response to the memory area that stores the game information subject to the reserved performance being shifted from the special chart 1 game information memory area (memory area 1) to memory area 0, the display area of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b2 (display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
Then, in response to the end of the notification display of the special pattern based on the game information for the reserved performance, the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information for the reserved performance in the reserved pattern display area b1 is terminated, thereby terminating the reserved performance.

In this embodiment, the types of hold effects are defined as normal hold effects and hold notice effects.
The "normal hold effect" is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of a pre-determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for the hold effect.
In this embodiment, normal hold and special hold are defined as the types (modes) of the reserved pattern h.
In the normal hold effect, a normal hold is displayed as a hold pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
A normal hold effect is started when the game information for the hold effect target (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is stored in the game information memory area (special chart 1 game information memory area or special chart 2 game information memory area), and is ended when the notification display of the special pattern based on the game information for the hold effect ends.

(Pre-order announcement)
The "reserved notice effect" is a type of pre-reading notice effect. In other words, the reserved notice effect is a type of reserved effect that suggests the result of the advance judgment (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the state of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the reserved notice performance is referred to as "reserved notice target game information." Also, the reserved symbol h that corresponds to the reserved notice target game information is referred to as "pre-notification target reserved symbol hy."
In this embodiment, the hold notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of a preliminary special pattern determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot pattern").
In addition, the hold notice performance may be configured to suggest the result of a preliminary special chart change pattern determination based on the hold notice target game information (specifically, the possibility of a "super reach change").
In the hold preview performance, a special hold is displayed as the preview target hold pattern hy.
In this embodiment, the following special hold modes (types) are defined: "blue hold,""greenhold,""purplehold," and "red hold."
In the hold preview performance, the state of the preview target hold pattern hy changes, and the state of the preview target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed suggests the result of the advance judgment based on the preview target game information (specifically, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur).
Here, the probability of a jackpot for each type of special reserve is specified as follows, in order from highest to lowest probability of a jackpot: "red reserve,""purplereserve,""greenreserve," and "blue reserve" (high probability of a jackpot → low probability of a jackpot).
The "expected jackpot probability" refers to the probability (degree) that a jackpot gaming state will occur when the mode in question is selected.

When the reserved notice performance is executed, one or more reserved change triggers and reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger are set. Then, in the reserved notice performance, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes according to the reserved change contents corresponding to the reserved change trigger in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger.
The "reserved change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified. Also, the "reserved change content" is a content for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified.
In this embodiment, the hold change trigger is defined as the start of a change performance corresponding to each advance hold information, the start of a change performance corresponding to the hold notice target game information, etc. Then, when the hold notice performance is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In this embodiment, the reserved notice performance is executed for each of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information. However, the reserved notice performance may be configured to be executed for only the special chart 1 game information among the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information.

(Variable effects)
Next, the variable effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the following explanation, the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a1 will be referred to as the "left pattern", the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a2 will be referred to as the "middle pattern", and the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a3 will be referred to as the "right pattern".
In this embodiment, while the variable performance (first half variable performance and second half variable performance) is being executed, the second performance pattern z2 is constantly displayed in a variable manner in the second performance pattern display area a4.

First, each aspect of the first half variable presentation will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, the following variation mode numbers are defined: a variation mode number corresponding to "no pseudo consecutive variation", a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive 2 variation", and a variation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive 3 variation".
In addition, the categories (types) of the first half change effect are defined as "no pseudo consecutive change effect", "pseudo consecutive 2 change effect", and "pseudo consecutive 3 change effect".
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the first half variable performance, one pattern or multiple patterns with different performance contents are specified.
And, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating without pseudo consecutive hits" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuation without pseudo consecutive hits" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 3" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuating with pseudo consecutive hits 3" is selected as the category of the first half fluctuation performance.

The "pseudo non-consecutive variable performance" is composed of a display performance in which a normal variable display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3.
The "normal variable display" is a display in which the type of first performance pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position of the first performance pattern display area a1 to a3 is changed sequentially at a constant tempo.
The "lottery result display position" is the position where the first performance pattern z1 is stopped and displayed during the stop performance.
Specifically, in the "pseudo non-consecutive variable performance", normal variable display of each pattern starts sequentially in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern.

The "pseudo continuous variation performance"("pseudo continuous 2 variation performance" and "pseudo continuous 3 variation performance") is a performance in which the variation display of the first performance pattern z1 is executed multiple times in a simulated manner during the execution of one variation display of the special pattern. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation performance is configured to include multiple pseudo variation performances.
Here, the "pseudo consecutive 2-change performance" is configured to include two pseudo-change performances. On the other hand, the "pseudo consecutive 3-change performance" is configured to include three pseudo-change performances.
Each pseudo-variation performance is composed of a display performance in which a normal variation display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and then a temporary stop display of the first performance pattern z1 is executed.
The "provisional stop display" is a pseudo stop display. Specifically, the provisional stop display is a display in which one type of first performance symbol z1 is moving in a predetermined manner (swinging, rotating, etc.) at the lottery result display position and remains there.
The "stop display" is a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 remains stopped at the lottery result display position.
Specifically, in each pseudo-variation performance, normal variation display of each symbol is started in the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol, and then provisional stop display of each symbol is executed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.
In particular, in each pseudo-variable performance, the combination of the first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is one of the combinations of "miss", "reach", and "chance". Here, in the final pseudo-variable performance, the combination of the first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 is the "reach", and a reach state is established.
A "miss" is a combination that is not included in the "jackpot patterns" (specifically, a combination in which the left, middle and right patterns do not match) (excluding certain combinations described below).
A "reach pattern" is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern" (specifically, a combination in which the left and right patterns are the same type).
A "chance eye" is a specific combination (e.g., a combination with a pattern such as "1, 2, 3") that is not included in the "jackpot pattern" (specifically, a combination in which the left, middle, and right patterns are not the same type).
The "reach state" is a state in which the first performance pattern z1 is temporarily displayed in two of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the combination of the temporarily displayed first performance patterns z1 is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern."

Next, each aspect of the second half variable presentation will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, the following variation pattern numbers are defined: a variation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach variation", a variation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach variation", and a variation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach variation".
In addition, the categories (types) of the latter half fluctuation effects are defined as "non-reach fluctuation effects", "normal reach fluctuation effects", and "super reach fluctuation effects".
Furthermore, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of the latter half variable performance, one pattern or multiple patterns with different performance contents are specified.
And when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "non-reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "non-reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "normal reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command, "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the category of the latter half fluctuation performance.

The "no-reach variable performance" is an performance that is executed following the "no-pseudo consecutive variable performance".
In this embodiment, the "non-reach variable performance" includes a "non-reach variable performance (miss)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "miss," and a "non-reach variable performance (jackpot)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "jackpot."
The "no-reach variable performance"("no-reach variable performance (miss)" and "no-reach variable performance (jackpot)") is composed of a display performance in which the normal variable display of the first special pattern z1 is executed in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3.
Specifically, in the "non-reach variable performance", after the normal variable display of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern is executed, each pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern.
At this time, in the "non-reach variable performance (miss)", the combination of first performance patterns z1 that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 becomes a "miss pattern".
On the other hand, in the "non-reach variable performance (jackpot)", the combination of first performance symbols z1 that are temporarily displayed in the three first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3 becomes a "jackpot symbol".

The "normal reach change effect" is an effect that is executed following the "pseudo continuous change effect"("pseudo continuous 2 change effect" and "pseudo continuous 3 change effect").
In this embodiment, the "normal reach change effect" is defined as a "normal reach change effect (miss)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit determination is a "miss", and a "normal reach change effect (jackpot)" that is executed when the result of the special chart hit determination is a "jackpot".
A "normal reach change effect"("normal reach change effect (miss)" and "normal reach change effect (jackpot)") is an effect that is executed while a reach state is being formed, and is composed of a display effect in which, after teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, the "jackpot pattern" does not form, or the "jackpot pattern" forms.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variable performance", during the period when the left and right symbols form a reach state, a reach performance image is displayed and then the center symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.
At this time, in the "normal reach variation effect (miss)", a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (the "jackpot pattern" is not formed).
On the other hand, in the "normal reach variation effect (jackpot)", a center pattern of the same type as the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (a "jackpot pattern" is formed).
The "reach effect image" is an effect image that encourages the player to see that the center symbol of the same type as the left and right symbols is temporarily stopped (the "big win symbol" is established). In this embodiment, the reach effect image is an image in which a character included in the center symbol performs a predetermined action, and an image in which a predetermined effect is applied to the center symbol.

The "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect" is an effect that is executed following the "Pseudo Continuous Fluctuation Effect"("Pseudo Continuous 2 Fluctuation Effect" and "Pseudo Continuous 3 Fluctuation Effect").
In this embodiment, the "super reach variation effect" is defined as a "super reach variation effect (miss)" which is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "miss", and a "super reach variation effect (jackpot)" which is executed when the result of the special chart hit judgment is a "jackpot".
A "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect"("Super Reach Fluctuation Effect (Miss)" and "Super Reach Fluctuation Effect (Jackpot)") is an effect that is executed while a reach state is being formed, and after teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, a display is executed which prevents the "jackpot pattern" from being formed, after which the display of the changing middle pattern is resumed, and then a display is executed which develops from the reach state to an advanced reach state, and again teasing whether or not a "jackpot pattern" will be formed, and then either the "jackpot pattern" is not formed or the "jackpot pattern" is formed.
The "developed reach state" is a state in which the two first special symbols z1 forming the reach state are displayed in a reduced size. In this embodiment, the left and right symbols forming the reach state are reduced and displayed at the top end of the display screen 31a, thereby forming the developed reach state. Note that the middle symbol is not displayed during the period in which the developed reach state is formed.
Specifically, in the "Super Reach Variable Performance", during the period when the left and right patterns form a reach state, the above-mentioned reach performance image is displayed, and then a middle pattern of a type different from the left and right patterns is displayed temporarily stopped, after which the variable display of the middle pattern resumes, after which a developed reach state is formed, and during the period when the developed reach state is formed, the developed reach performance image is displayed, and then the middle pattern is displayed temporarily stopped.
At this time, in the "Super Reach Variation Presentation (Miss)", a middle symbol of a type different from the left and right symbols is temporarily displayed (the "jackpot symbol" is not formed).
On the other hand, in the "Super Reach Variation Presentation (Big Hit)", a center pattern of the same type as the left and right patterns is temporarily displayed (a "Big Hit pattern" is formed).
The "development reach effect image" is an effect image that encourages the left and right symbols to be displayed as a temporary stop (a "jackpot symbol" is established). In this embodiment, a predetermined background image is displayed as the development reach effect image.

In this embodiment, a plurality of types of "super reach variation effects"("super reach variation effects (miss)" and "super reach variation effects (jackpot)") with different jackpot expectancies are set. In particular, the plurality of types includes a "specific super reach variation effect."
In the "specific super reach variable performance", a "specific development reach performance image" is displayed as a development reach performance image.
The “specific development reach performance image” is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the shape of the speaker 22 .
In particular, in this embodiment, the image data (compressed image data) of the "specific development reach performance image" stored includes "specific development reach performance image data A" corresponding to "decorative unit A,""specific development reach performance image data B" corresponding to "decorative unit B,""specific development reach performance image data C" corresponding to "decorative unit C," and "specific development reach performance image data D" corresponding to "decorative unit D."
The "specific development reach performance image data A" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit A". Furthermore, the "specific development reach performance image data B" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit B". Furthermore, the "specific development reach performance image data C" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit C". Furthermore, the "specific development reach performance image data D" is configured to include a display of an image that imitates the speaker 22 provided in the "decorative unit D".

When executing a "specific super reach variation performance", the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires a first material replacement offset value stored in a first material replacement offset storage area. Then, image data corresponding to the acquired first material replacement offset value is set as image data for a "specific development reach performance image".
In this case, if "0" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data A" is set, if "1" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data B" is set, if "2" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data C" is set, and if "3" is stored in the first material replacement offset memory area, "specific development reach performance image data D" is set.
As a result, when a "specific super reach variation performance" is executed, the appearance of the "specific development reach performance image" will be in accordance with the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4.
In other words, when the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data A" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data B" is displayed as the "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit C", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data C" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".
On the other hand, if the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit D", an image based on "specific development reach performance image data D" is displayed as a "specific development reach performance image".
As described above, in this embodiment, the "specific super reach variation effect" is a common effect for a plurality of different models. That is, the "specific super reach variation effect" is a common effect executed for a model equipped with "decoration unit A", a model equipped with "decoration unit B", a model equipped with "decoration unit C", and a model equipped with "decoration unit D".
In particular, for the "specific development reach performance image" among the performance images that make up the "specific super reach variation performance," a mode corresponding to the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 (the relevant model) is set (a performance image is displayed), and for the other performance images, a common mode is set (a performance image is displayed) for all types of decorative unit DU (all models) regardless of the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4.

(Main preview performance)
Next, the main preview performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "main preview performance" is a performance executed during a variable performance, and is a performance that suggests the result of the start judgment related to the variable performance (special chart hit judgment, special chart pattern judgment, special chart variable pattern judgment, etc.).
In this embodiment, the main preview performance suggests the result of the special pattern determination (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot pattern").
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of main preview effects having different presentation contents are defined as types of main preview effects. In particular, the plurality of types includes a "button preview effect."
During execution of the button preview performance, an operation-enabled state is set. During the period in which the operation-enabled state is set, operation of the operation means (the performance button 5b, etc.) is enabled. On the other hand, during the period in which the operation-enabled state is released, operation of the operation means is disabled.
In the button preview performance, an effective operation state is set in response to the start of the performance. The effective operation state is released in response to the establishment of one of the following conditions: a predetermined effective operation time has elapsed since the setting of the effective operation state, or the number of times that the operation of the operating means has been detected has reached a predetermined number. The button preview performance is terminated in response to the elapse of a predetermined notification time since the release of the effective operation state.
In the following description, the period from the setting of the operation valid state (the start of the button preview) to the release of the operation valid state is referred to as the "operation valid period." Also, the period from the release of the operation valid state to the passage of a predetermined notification time (the end of the button preview) is referred to as the "result notification period."

In the button preview performance, a button preview performance image is displayed on the display screen 31a during the valid operation period.
The "button preview image" is composed of an image (icon) that resembles an operating means, a time bar that indicates the remaining time until the end of the valid operation period, and information (text) that encourages the user to operate the operating means.
In addition, in the button preview performance, a result notification image is displayed on the display screen 31a during the result notification period.
The "result notification image" is configured to include information suggesting the result of the start judgment (in this embodiment, the special chart hit judgment).
In particular, in this embodiment, the image data (compressed image data) for the "button preview performance image" stored includes "button preview performance image data A" corresponding to "receiving tray unit A,""button preview performance image data B" corresponding to "receiving tray unit B,""button preview performance image data C" corresponding to "receiving tray unit C," and "button preview performance image data D" corresponding to "receiving tray unit D."
The "button preview performance image data A" is composed of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., performance button 5b) provided on the "receiving tray unit A". The "button preview performance image data B" is composed of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., an operating lever) provided on the "receiving tray unit B". The "button preview performance image data C" is composed of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., a trigger of an object that imitates a gun) provided on the "receiving tray unit C". The "button preview performance image data D" is composed of an image that imitates an operating means (e.g., an object that can be pressed) provided on the "receiving tray unit D".

When executing the "button advance notice performance", the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 acquires the second material replacement offset value stored in the second material replacement offset storage area. Then, image data corresponding to the acquired second material replacement offset value is set as image data for the "button advance notice performance image".
In this case, if "0" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data A" is set, if "1" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data B" is set, if "2" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data C" is set, and if "3" is stored in the second material replacement offset memory area, "button preview performance image data D" is set.
As a result, when the ``button preview performance'' is executed, the appearance of the ``button preview performance image'' will be in accordance with the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4.
In other words, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A", an image based on "button preview performance image data A" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B", an image based on "button preview performance image data B" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit C", an image based on "button preview performance image data C" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
On the other hand, when the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D", an image based on "button preview performance image data D" is displayed as the "button preview performance image".
As described above, in this embodiment, the "button advance notice effect" is a common effect for a plurality of different models. That is, the "button advance notice effect" is a common effect for a model equipped with a "catch tray unit A," a model equipped with a "catch tray unit B," a model equipped with a "catch tray unit C," and a model equipped with a "catch tray unit D."
In particular, among the performance images that make up the ``button preview performance,'' for the ``button preview performance image,'' a mode corresponding to the type of receiving tray unit SU (the relevant model) attached to the front frame unit 4 is set (a performance image is displayed), and for the other performance images (result notification images), a common mode is set (a performance image is displayed) for all types of receiving tray unit SU (all models), regardless of the type of receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4.

(Stop effect)
Next, the stopping effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The "stop effect" is an effect that is executed while the special symbol is displayed in a stopped state.
In the stop performance, the first performance pattern z1 is displayed stopped in each of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the second performance pattern z2 is displayed stopped in the second performance pattern display area a4.

(Big hit performance)
Next, the big win presentation executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
The big win performance is an performance that is executed during the occurrence of a big win gaming state.
In the pachinko machine 1, "jackpot performance 1" to "jackpot performance 6" are defined as categories (types) of jackpot performance.
In addition, as a pattern (mode) belonging to each category of big win presentation, one pattern or a plurality of patterns with different presentation contents are defined.
Then, when the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 1 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 1" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect. On the other hand, when the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 2 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 2" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect. When the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 3 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 3" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect. When the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 4 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 4" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect. When the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 5 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 5" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect. When the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "jackpot 6 symbol" is specified by the opening designation command, "jackpot effect 6" is selected as the category of the jackpot effect.

The big win presentation includes an opening presentation executed during the opening period, an interval presentation executed during the interval period, a round presentation executed during a round of play, an ending presentation executed during the ending period, and the like.
The "opening period" is the period from the start of the jackpot gaming state until the opening time has elapsed.
The "interval period" is the period from the end of the opening period to the start of the first round of play, or the period from the end of each round of play to the start of the next round of play.
The ending period is the period from the end of the interval period following the end of the final round of play until the ending time has elapsed.

(Waiting for customers)
Next, the customer waiting state that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, when a predetermined condition is met, a customer waiting state is generated.
The "waiting for customers state" is a state in which a special game (variable display/stop display of special symbols and jackpot game state) is not being executed. Note that the waiting for customers state may be a state in which a special game (variable display/stop display of special symbols and jackpot game state) is not being executed and a normal game (variable display/stop display of normal symbols and normal jackpot game state) is not being executed.
Specifically, the customer waiting state is initiated upon receipt of a demo designation command, and is terminated upon receipt of a command designating the start of the varying display of special symbols (a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, or a variation pattern designation command).
In other words, the customer waiting state is initiated when the number of reserved special symbols 1 is "0" and the number of reserved special symbols 2 is "0" at the end of the stopped display of the special symbols (except when a jackpot game state occurs after the end of the stopped display of the special symbols).
In addition, the customer waiting state is initiated when the number of reserved special charts 1 is "0" and the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0" at the end of the jackpot game state.
The customer waiting state is ended in response to the start of the varying display of the special symbols (or the acquisition of game information).

(Performance customization function)
Next, the performance customization function installed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, the settings relating to the presentation can be changed (customized) in response to the player's operation of various operating means.
In this embodiment, a number of items including a light intensity setting, a volume setting, and a custom effect setting are set as setting items related to the effects that can be customized.

(Light intensity setting)
The "light intensity setting" is a setting of the light intensity (brightness) of various light sources used for the effect (specifically, the light-emitting elements that make up the various lamps 20, 21, the backlights that make up the various image display devices 31, etc.).
Specifically, the RAM of the performance control board 300 is provided with a light intensity designation information setting area in which light intensity designation information is set (stored).
The "light intensity designation information" is information that designates the light intensity of various light sources for effecting. In this embodiment, the light intensity of various light sources for effecting can be adjusted in five stages. Therefore, light intensity designation information that designates each stage from the first stage (lower) to the fifth stage (higher) is defined as the light intensity designation information.
In the light intensity designation information setting area, light intensity designation information that designates one of the first to fifth stages is set (stored). Then, the light intensity of various light sources for effecting is controlled according to the light intensity designation information set in the light intensity designation information setting area. At this time, the light intensity of various light sources for effecting increases (brighter light emission) as the light intensity designation information that designates a higher stage is set.
In the pachinko machine 1, the third stage is set as the initial value of the setting contents of the light intensity setting. That is, when the initial setting process (step S28-1) described later is executed, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, light intensity designation information designating the third stage) is set in the light intensity designation information setting area.
Then, when the waiting state occurs, only in the first custom state described below, it is possible to change the light intensity setting contents to any one of the first stage to the fifth stage by pressing the light intensity adjustment button. That is, when the waiting state occurs, only in the first custom state, it is possible to change the light intensity designation information set in the light intensity designation information setting area to light intensity designation information that designates any one of the first stage to the fifth stage by pressing the light intensity adjustment button.
On the other hand, when the waiting-for-customers state is not occurring (when a special game is being played), only during the third custom state described below, the light intensity setting can be changed to any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the light intensity adjustment button. That is, during the irregular waiting-for-customers state, only during the third custom state, the light intensity designation information set in the light intensity designation information setting area can be changed to light intensity designation information that designates any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the light intensity adjustment button.

(Volume settings)
The "volume setting" is a setting for the volume of sounds (effect sounds) output from the various speakers 22. In this embodiment, the volume setting cannot be changed for sounds (warning sounds) output from the various speakers 22 when various errors (abnormal states) occur.
Specifically, the RAM of the performance control board 300 is provided with a volume designation information setting area in which volume designation information is set (stored).
The "volume designation information" is information that designates the volume of the sound (effect sound) output from the various speakers 22. In this embodiment, the volume of the sound (effect sound) output from the various speakers 22 can be adjusted in five stages. Therefore, volume designation information that designates each stage from the first stage (lower) to the fifth stage (higher) is defined as the volume designation information.
In the volume designation information setting area, volume designation information that designates one of the first to fifth stages is set (stored). Then, the volume of the sound (effect sound) output from the various speakers 22 is controlled according to the volume designation information set in the volume designation information setting area. At this time, the higher the volume designation information that designates a higher stage, the higher the volume of the sound (effect sound) output from the various speakers 22 (the louder the sound).
In the pachinko machine 1, the third stage is set as the initial value of the setting contents of the volume setting. That is, when the initial setting process (step S28-1) described later is executed, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, the volume designation information designating the third stage) is set in the volume designation information setting area.
Then, when the vehicle is in a waiting state for customers, only in the first custom state described below, the volume setting contents can be changed to any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the volume adjustment button. That is, when the vehicle is in a waiting state for customers, only in the first custom state, the volume designation information set in the volume designation information setting area can be changed to volume designation information that designates any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the volume adjustment button.
On the other hand, when the waiting-for-customers state is not occurring (when a special game is being played), only in the third custom state, it is possible to change the volume setting contents to any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the volume adjustment button. In other words, when the waiting-for-customers state is not occurring, only in the third custom state, it is possible to change the volume designation information set in the volume designation information setting area to volume designation information that designates any one of the first to fifth stages by pressing the volume adjustment button.

(Custom production settings)
FIG. 76 is a diagram showing effect customization types.
FIG. 76(a) shows effect customization types whose customization contents can be changed (customized) during each game state, and FIG. 76(b) shows the customization contents corresponding to each effect customization type.
"Custom performance settings" provide detailed settings for the performance.
As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the types of customizable effect custom settings (hereinafter referred to as "effect custom types") include "custom initialization", "automatic button push", "treble cut mode ON/OFF", "low probability pre-reading frequency custom", "high probability pre-reading frequency custom", and "premium up custom".
As shown in FIG. 76(a), among the above-mentioned performance customization types, "customization initialization", "automatic button push", "treble cut mode ON/OFF" and "premium up customization" are displayed as performance customization items whose customization contents can be changed (customized) in any of the game states, among the waiting state for customers, the low probability state of special chart, the high probability state of special chart, and the jackpot game state. As a result, for "customization initialization", "automatic button push", "treble cut mode ON/OFF" and "premium up customization", the customization contents can be changed in any of the game states, among the waiting state for customers, the low probability state of special chart, the high probability state of special chart, and the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, among the above-mentioned performance customization types, the "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization" is displayed as a performance customization item whose customization content can be changed only during the customer waiting state and the special chart low probability state among the customer waiting state, the special chart low probability state, the special chart high probability state, and the jackpot game state, and is not displayed as a performance customization item whose customization content can be changed during the special chart high probability state and the jackpot game state. As a result, the customization content can be changed for the "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization" during the customer waiting state and the special chart low probability state, and the customization content cannot be changed during the special chart high probability state and the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, among the above-mentioned performance customization types, the "high probability pre-reading frequency customization" is displayed as a performance customization item whose customization content can be changed only during the customer waiting state and the special chart high probability state among the customer waiting state, the special chart low probability state, the special chart high probability state, and the jackpot game state, and is not displayed as a performance customization item whose customization content can be changed during the special chart low probability state and the jackpot game state. As a result, for the "high probability pre-reading frequency customization", the customization content can be changed during the customer waiting state and the special chart high probability state, and the customization content cannot be changed during the special chart low probability state and the jackpot game state.

"Custom Initialization" is a setting related to the initialization of custom content.
As shown in Fig. 76(b), "NO" and "YES" are stipulated as the customization content for "custom initialization". This makes it possible to set (customize) either "NO" or "YES" as the customization content for "custom initialization".
When "YES" is set as the customization content of "Custom Initialization", it becomes possible to initialize (return to the initial state) the customization content for all effect customization types via an initialization confirmation image described below. On the other hand, when "NO" is set as the customization content of "Custom Initialization", the initialization of the customization content is not executed.

"AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is a setting for automatically pressing the effect button 5b.
As shown in Fig. 76(b), "OFF" and "ON" are defined as the custom content for the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH". This makes it possible to set (customize) the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" to either "OFF" or "ON" as the custom content.
When "ON" is set as the custom content of "AUTO BUTTON PUSH", the automatic button press function is enabled (executed). On the other hand, when "OFF" is set as the custom content of "AUTO BUTTON PUSH", the automatic button press function is disabled (stopped).
The "automatic button press function" is a function that, even if a press of the effect button 5b is not detected during the valid operation period in the "button preview effect," continues the effect as if a press of the effect button 5b had been detected.
Specifically, when the automatic button pressing function is enabled, the performance proceeds assuming that pressing of the performance button 5b is detected at a predetermined timing during the valid operation period.

“Treble cut mode ON/OFF” is a setting related to the frequency band of the sound (performance sound) output from the various speakers 22 .
As shown in Fig. 76(b), "OFF" and "ON" are defined as the customization content for "treble cut mode ON/OFF". This makes it possible to set (customize) either "OFF" or "ON" as the customization content for "treble cut mode ON/OFF".
When "ON" is set as the custom content of "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF", the treble cut function is enabled (executed). On the other hand, when "OFF" is set as the custom content of "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF", the treble cut function is disabled (stopped).
The "treble cut function" is a function for cutting (removing) a frequency band exceeding a predetermined threshold from the sound (performance sound) output from the various speakers 22.

"Custom pre-reading frequency when probability is low" is a setting regarding the frequency with which the pre-reading preview effect (pending preview effect) appears during a special chart low probability state.
As shown in FIG. 76(b), for the "custom low probability read-ahead frequency", "default", "low occurrence frequency", and "high occurrence frequency" are specified as the customization contents. As a result, for the "custom low probability read-ahead frequency", it is possible to set (customize) any of "default", "low occurrence frequency", and "high occurrence frequency" as the customization contents.
When "default" is set as the customization content of "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery (step S33-5) described later for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart low probability state is the first probability. On the other hand, when "low occurrence frequency" is set as the customization content of "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart low probability state is the second probability lower than the first probability. On the other hand, when "high occurrence frequency" is set as the customization content of "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart low probability state is the third probability higher than the first probability.

"Custom pre-reading frequency during high probability" is a setting regarding the frequency of the pre-reading preview effect (hold preview effect) appearing during a special chart high probability state.
As shown in Fig. 76(b), for "custom high probability read-ahead frequency", "default", "low occurrence frequency", "medium occurrence frequency", and "high occurrence frequency" are specified as customization contents. This makes it possible to set (customize) any of "default", "low occurrence frequency", "medium occurrence frequency", and "high occurrence frequency" as customization contents for "custom high probability read-ahead frequency".
When "default" is set as the customization content of "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery (step S33-5) described later for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart high probability state is the first probability. On the other hand, when "low frequency of appearance" is set as the customization content of "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart high probability state is the second probability lower than the first probability. On the other hand, when "medium frequency of appearance" is set as the customization content of "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart high probability state is the third probability higher than the first probability. On the other hand, when "high frequency of appearance" is set as the customization content of "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization", the probability of winning the pre-reading notice performance lottery for the pre-reading notice performance executed during the special chart high probability state is the fourth probability higher than the third probability.

"Premium Up Custom" is a setting that determines the frequency with which certain premium effects appear.
In this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specific super reach variable performance"("specific development reach performance image") is defined as a specific premium performance.
As shown in Fig. 76(b), for "premium up customization", "default", "low appearance frequency", "medium appearance frequency", and "high appearance frequency" are specified as the customization contents. This makes it possible to set (customize) any of "default", "low appearance frequency", "medium appearance frequency", and "high appearance frequency" as the customization contents for "premium up customization".
When "default" is set as the customization content of "premium up custom", the probability that "specific super reach fluctuation effect" is selected as the type of "super reach fluctuation effect" is the first probability. On the other hand, when "low frequency of occurrence" is set as the customization content of "premium up custom", the probability that "specific super reach fluctuation effect" is selected as the type of "super reach fluctuation effect" is the second probability, which is lower than the first probability. On the other hand, when "medium frequency of occurrence" is set as the customization content of "premium up custom", the probability that "specific super reach fluctuation effect" is selected as the type of "super reach fluctuation effect" is the third probability, which is higher than the first probability. On the other hand, when "high frequency of occurrence" is set as the customization content of "premium up custom", the probability that "specific super reach fluctuation effect" is selected as the type of "super reach fluctuation effect" is the fourth probability, which is higher than the third probability.

In the pachinko machine 1, when the initial setting process (step S28-1) described later is executed, the customization contents are initialized (initial state is set) for each performance customization type. At this time, "NO" is set as the initial state for "customization initialization", "OFF" is set as the initial state for "automatic button push", "OFF" is set as the initial state for "treble cut mode ON/OFF", "default" is set as the initial state for "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization", "default" is set as the initial state for "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization", and "default" is set as the initial state for "premium up customization".
Specifically, a custom information storage area is provided in the DRAM 304. The custom information storage area includes a first area in which information specifying the custom contents of "custom initialization" is stored, a second area in which information specifying the custom contents of "automatic button push" is stored, a third area in which information specifying the custom contents of "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is stored, a fourth area in which information specifying the custom contents of "low probability time pre-reading frequency customization" is stored, a fifth area in which information specifying the custom contents of "high probability time pre-reading frequency customization" is stored, and a sixth area in which information specifying the custom contents of "premium up customization" is stored.
Then, by the initial setting process (step S28-1), in the first area of the custom information storage area, information specifying custom content = "NO" is stored (set), in the second area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the third area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the fourth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), in the fifth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), and in the sixth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set).
In particular, when the game is in a waiting state for customers, in the second customization state described below, it is possible to change (customize) the customization content for each performance customization type by pressing the directional pad buttons, the performance button 5b, etc.
On the other hand, during the irregular waiting state for customers (when a special game is being played), in the fourth customization state described below, it is possible to change (customize) the customization content for each effect customization type by pressing the directional pad buttons, effect button 5b, etc.

(How to change the settings related to the production)
Next, a method for changing the settings related to the effects (customization method) will be described.
FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of a first custom interface image IF1. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a display transition during the first custom state. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a display transition at the end of the first custom state. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing an example of a second custom interface image IF2. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a display transition during the second custom state according to the first example. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a display transition during the second custom state according to the second example. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an example of a custom change message image cm. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a display transition at the end of the second custom state. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a display transition of the custom change message image cm at the end of the second custom state. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a display transition at the end of the fourth custom state. FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a display transition of the custom change message image cm at the end of the fourth custom state.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change the light intensity setting and the sound volume setting in the first customization state or the third customization state. Also, it is possible to change the effect customization setting in the second customization state or the fourth customization state.

(First custom state)
The first custom state is set while a customer waiting state occurs.
That is, when the customization start condition is satisfied while the vehicle is in a waiting state for a customer, the first customization state is started.
In this embodiment, the custom start condition is met when either of the following conditions is met: (1) "a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 20.0 s) has elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (reception of the demo designation command)" and (2) "the pressing of the performance button 5b has been detected."
In addition, the custom start condition may be configured to be met when either of the following conditions is met: (1) "the duration of the state in which no touch signal is input from the touch sensor 412 to the launch condition detection unit 422 reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 20.0 [s])" and (2) "the pressing operation of the performance button 5b is detected."

In the first custom state, a first custom interface image IF1 shown in FIG. 77 is displayed on the display screen 31a.
The first custom interface image IF1 is displayed superimposed on the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped. At this time, the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed in a layer higher than the first performance symbol z1 (nearby or in front of the first performance symbol z1). As a result, the first custom interface image IF1 covers (conceals) all or part of the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped.
The first custom interface image IF1 includes a light intensity setting image im1, a volume setting image im2, and a cross key button explanation image im3.
The light intensity setting image im1 is composed of a display of information indicating the current light intensity setting contents, and a display of information informing that the light intensity setting contents can be changed by pressing the light intensity adjustment button.
The volume setting image im2 is composed of a display of information indicating the current volume setting contents and a display of information informing the user that the volume setting contents can be changed by pressing the volume adjustment button.
The cross key button explanation image im3 is configured to include a display of information informing that a shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" can be displayed by pressing the right key button, a display of information informing that a shortcut window SW corresponding to "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF" can be displayed by pressing the left key button, a display of information informing that a shortcut window SW corresponding to "Auto Button PUSH" can be displayed by pressing the up key button, and a display of information informing that a second custom interface image IF2 can be displayed by pressing the down key button.

In the first custom state, it is possible to change the light intensity setting by pressing the light intensity adjustment button, and in the first custom state, it is possible to change the volume setting by pressing the volume adjustment button.
In addition, during the first customization state, it is possible to change the customization content for some of the above-mentioned effect customization types by using a shortcut function. In this embodiment, it is possible to change the customization content for "AUTO BUTTON PUSH", "TREBLE CUT MODE ON/OFF", and "PREMIUM UP CUSTOM" among the above-mentioned effect customization types by using a shortcut function during the first customization state.

Specifically, in response to the start of the first custom state, the display of a first custom interface image IF1 begins on the display screen 31a (see FIG. 78(a)).
When a press of the light intensity adjustment button is detected while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, the light intensity settings are changed accordingly.Furthermore, when a press of the volume adjustment button is detected while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, the volume settings are changed accordingly.
On the other hand, when a press of the left key button is detected while the first custom interface image IF1 is being displayed, in response, a shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed on the display screen 31a in place of the first custom interface image IF1 (see Figure 78 (a) → (b)).
The shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is configured to include a display of information informing that the customization content for "treble cut mode ON/OFF" can be changed by pressing the left key button and the right key button, and a display of information indicating the customization content set for "treble cut mode ON/OFF" (hereinafter referred to as "customization content display").
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed, each time a press of the left or right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" ...), and the information stored in the third area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed and the duration of the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected reaches a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment), the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" on the display screen 31a is accordingly terminated, and the display returns to the first custom interface image IF1 (see Figure 78 (a)).

On the other hand, when a press of the up key button is detected while the first custom interface image IF1 is being displayed, in response, a shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed on the display screen 31a in place of the first custom interface image IF1 (see Figure 78 (a) → (c)).
The shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is configured to include a display of information informing that the custom content for the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" can be changed by pressing the left and right buttons, and a display of information indicating the custom content set for the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" (hereinafter referred to as "custom content display").
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed, each time a press operation of the left key button or the right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" ...), and the information stored in the second area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed and the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected continues for a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment), the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" on the display screen 31a is terminated and the display returns to the first custom interface image IF1 (see FIG. 78 (a)).

On the other hand, when a press of the right key button is detected while the first custom interface image IF1 is being displayed, in response to this, a shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is displayed on the display screen 31a in place of the first custom interface image IF1 (see Figure 78 (a) → (d)).
The shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is configured to include a display of information notifying that the customization contents of "Premium Up Custom" can be changed by pressing the left and right buttons, and a display of information indicating the customization contents set for "Premium Up Custom" (hereinafter referred to as "customization content display").
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Customization" is displayed, each time a press operation of the left key button or the right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "default" → "low frequency of occurrence" → "medium frequency of occurrence" → "high frequency of occurrence" → "default" ...), and the information stored in a sixth area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected continues for a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment) while the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is displayed, the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" on the display screen 31a is terminated, and the display returns to the first custom interface image IF1 (see FIG. 78 (a)).

On the other hand, if pressing of the down button is detected while first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, then in response, the first custom state is terminated and the second custom state is initiated. In particular, if pressing of the down button is detected while first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, then in response, the display of first custom interface image IF1 is terminated on display screen 31a and display of second custom interface image IF2 is initiated (see FIG. 79(a)->(b)).
Furthermore, when the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, the first custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a return is made to the customer waiting state while the first custom state is not occurring and the second custom state is not occurring. In particular, when the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended accordingly, and a return is made to the image corresponding to the customer waiting state (see FIG. 79(a)→(c)).
The "no operation state" is a state in which no operation is detected for any of the performance buttons 5b, the light intensity adjustment buttons, the volume adjustment buttons, and the cross key buttons.
Furthermore, when the variation of the special symbol starts while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed (in this embodiment, when any subcommand of the symbol type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the first custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to the execution of the special game (during the variation display of the special symbol). In particular, when the variation of the special symbol starts while the first custom interface image IF1 is displayed (in this embodiment, when any subcommand of the symbol type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the display of the first custom interface image IF1 is ended accordingly, and the variation display of the performance symbols z1 and z2 starts (see FIG. 79(a)→(d)).
In addition, if a specific display termination condition is met while the first custom interface image IF1 is being displayed, the display of the first custom interface image IF1 is terminated in response to the fulfillment of the specific display condition, and the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a specific abnormal state is commenced.
In this embodiment, the "specific display termination condition" is defined as the detection of the occurrence of a specific abnormal state (vibration error, magnetic error, radio wave error, right-hit error, illegal winning error, decorative unit error, etc.).
The occurrence of a "vibration error" is determined when a predetermined vibration is detected by the vibration detection sensor 113. The occurrence of a "radio wave error" is determined when a predetermined radio wave is detected by the radio wave detection sensor 114. The occurrence of a "magnetic error" is determined when a predetermined magnetism (magnetic force) is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 115. The occurrence of a "right hit error" is determined when the value of the right hit error counter reaches a predetermined value. The occurrence of an "illegal winning error" is determined when the number of game balls that have entered the special ball entrance (the second start opening 52, the large winning opening 53, etc.) reaches a predetermined number during a period when it is impossible (difficult) for a ball to enter the special ball entrance. The occurrence of a "decoration unit error" is determined when it is determined that the decoration unit DU is not attached to the front frame unit 4 (the decoration unit DU is not completely attached to the front frame unit 4).
In addition, as a condition for terminating a specific display, in addition to or instead of the detection of the occurrence of a specific abnormal state, it may be specified that a specific pre-reading preview performance is started, that the passing of a game ball through a performance gate is detected, etc.
The "effect gate" is provided in the game area 30. Then, in response to detection of the game ball passing through the effect gate, a predetermined effect is executed.

(Second custom state)
The second custom state is set while a customer waiting state occurs.
As described above, when a press of the down button is detected while first custom interface image IF1 is being displayed, the second custom state is initiated.
In the second custom state, a second custom interface image IF2 shown in FIG. 80 is displayed on the display screen 31a.
The second custom interface image IF2 is displayed superimposed on the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped. At this time, the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed in a layer higher than the first performance symbol z1 (nearby or in front of the first performance symbol z1). As a result, the second custom interface image IF2 covers (conceals) all or part of the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped.
The second custom interface image IF2 is configured to include a performance customization type display section dp1, a customization content explanation display section dp2, and a customization content display section dp3.
The effect customization type display section dp1 displays the selected effect customization type.
The customization content explanation display section dp2 displays an explanation of the customization content that can be changed for the effect customization type displayed in the effect customization type display section dp1.
The customization content display section dp3 displays the customization content selected for the effect customization type displayed in the effect customization type display section dp1.

In the second customization state, it is possible to change the customization content for all of the above-mentioned effect customization types.
Specifically, in response to the start of the second custom state, the display of a second custom interface image IF2 begins on the display screen 31a (see FIG. 81(a)).
Then, each time a pressing operation of the down key button is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1 is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "Custom Initialization" → "Auto Button PUSH" → "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF" → "Low Probability Pre-reading Frequency Custom" → "High Probability Pre-reading Frequency Custom" → "Premium Up Custom" → "Custom Initialization" ...) (see FIG. 81 (a) → (b)). At this time, with the change in the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1, the explanation of the custom content displayed in the custom content description display section dp2 and the custom content displayed in the custom content display section dp3 are also changed to the content corresponding to the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1.
On the other hand, each time a pressing operation of the up key button is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1 is changed in the reverse order to the above-mentioned predetermined order (in this embodiment, "Custom Initialization" → "Premium Up Custom" → "High Probability Pre-reading Frequency Custom" → "Low Probability Pre-reading Frequency Custom" → "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF" → "Auto Button PUSH" → "Custom Initialization" ...) (see FIG. 81 (a) → (c)). At this time, with the change in the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1, the explanation of the custom content displayed in the custom content description display section dp2 and the custom content displayed in the custom content display section dp3 are also changed to the content corresponding to the effect custom type displayed in the effect custom type display section dp1.
At this time, during the second custom state, by pressing the up key or down key button, it is possible to select all effect custom types ("Custom initialization", "Auto button push", "Treble cut mode ON/OFF", "Low probability pre-reading frequency custom", "High probability pre-reading frequency custom", and "Premium up custom").

Furthermore, each time a press of the right button is detected while second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the customization contents displayed in customization content display section dp3 are changed in a predetermined order.
On the other hand, each time a press of the left button is detected while second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the customization contents displayed in customization content display section dp3 are changed in the reverse order to the above-mentioned predetermined order.
At this time, during the second customization state, by pressing the right or left key button, it is possible to select all of the customization contents defined for the selected performance customization type (the performance customization type displayed in the performance customization type display section dp1).
For example, when "Custom look-ahead frequency at low probability" is selected (when "Custom look-ahead frequency at low probability" is displayed in the performance custom type display section dp1), each time a press of the right key button is detected, the custom content displayed in the custom content display section dp3 is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "default" → "low occurrence frequency" → "high occurrence frequency" → "default", etc.) (see Figures 82 (a) → (b)).
On the other hand, when "Custom look-ahead frequency at low probability" is selected (when "Custom look-ahead frequency at low probability" is displayed in the performance custom type display unit dp1), each time a press of the left key button is detected, the custom content displayed in the custom content display unit dp3 is changed in the reverse order to the above-mentioned specified order (in this embodiment, "default" → "high occurrence frequency" → "low occurrence frequency" → "default", etc.) (see Figures 82 (a) → (c)).

As a result, while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, it is possible to select the customization content for each effect customization type ("Custom initialization", "Auto button push", "Treble cut mode ON/OFF", "Low probability pre-reading frequency custom", "High probability pre-reading frequency custom" and "Premium up custom") by pressing the directional pad button.
Here, in this embodiment, even if custom content is selected for each effect customization type by pressing the directional pad buttons, the selected custom content will not be confirmed and will not be reflected in the custom information storage area unless the pressing of effect button 5b is detected.
In other words, when a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is accordingly terminated on the display screen 31a, and the second custom state is terminated.
In addition, when a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, in response to this, it is determined whether or not the custom content indicated by the information stored in the custom information storage area (internally set custom content) matches the custom content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 for all effect custom types.
Then, when it is determined that the custom content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 differs from the custom content (internally set custom content) indicated by the information stored in the custom information storage area for at least one performance customization type, a custom information storage area update process is executed, and on the display screen 31a, in response to the end of the display of the second custom interface image IF2 (end of the second custom state), the display of the custom change message image cm shown in FIG. 83 is started.
In the following description, a performance customization type for which it is determined that the customization content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 is different from the customization content indicated by the information stored in the customization information storage area (internally set customization content) is referred to as a "changed performance customization type."

In the custom information storage area update process, for each changed performance custom type, the information stored in the custom information storage area is changed (overwritten). Specifically, for each changed performance custom type, the information stored in the area (first area to sixth area) of the custom information storage area that corresponds to the changed performance custom type is changed (overwritten) to information that specifies the custom content that corresponds to the changed performance custom type from among the custom content selected in the second custom interface image IF2.
The customization change message image cm includes a display of information indicating that the customization content has been changed for at least one effect customization type.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customization content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 does not differ from the customization content (internally set customization content) indicated by the information stored in the customization information storage area for all effect customization types, the customization information storage area update process is not executed. In other words, if there is no changed effect customization type, the customization information storage area update process is not executed. In this case, in response to detection of a press operation of the effect button 5b, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is terminated (the second custom state is terminated) on the display screen 31a, and the customization change message image cm is not displayed.

Specifically, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when a changed effect custom type exists), the second custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to a customer waiting state while the first custom state is not occurring and while the second custom state is not occurring. In particular, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when a changed effect custom type exists), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended in response on the display screen 31a, and the display of the custom message image cm is started (see FIG. 84 (a)->(b)).
On the other hand, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when there is no changed effect custom type), the second custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to a customer waiting state while the first custom state is not occurring and while the second custom state is not occurring. In particular, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when there is no changed effect custom type), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended on the display screen 31a accordingly, and a return is made to the display of an image corresponding to the customer waiting state (not shown).
Furthermore, when the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, the second custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to a customer waiting state while the first custom state and the second custom state are not occurring. When the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended accordingly, and a return is made to the display of an image corresponding to the customer waiting state (see FIG. 84 (a)->(c)).
Furthermore, when the variation of the special symbol starts while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (in this embodiment, when any subcommand of the symbol type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the second custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to the execution of the special game (during the variation display of the special symbol). In particular, when the variation of the special symbol starts while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (in this embodiment, when any subcommand of the symbol type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended accordingly, and the variation display of the performance symbols z1 and z2 starts (see FIG. 84(a)→(d)).
In addition, if the above-mentioned specific display termination condition is met while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is terminated in response to the establishment of the specific display condition, and the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a specific abnormal state is commenced.

The display of the custom change message image cm is ended in response to the passage of a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) from the start of the display. In particular, even if the variation of the special pattern starts during the display of the custom change message image cm (in this embodiment, when any subcommand of the pattern type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the display of the custom change message image cm is not ended in response to this, and continues until the predetermined time has passed.
Specifically, when a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the display of the customized change message image cm, the display of the customized change message image cm is accordingly terminated (see FIG. 85(a)→(b)). At this time, in response to the termination of the display of the customized change message image cm, the display returns to the image corresponding to the customer waiting state.
On the other hand, even if the variation of the special pattern starts before a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the display of the custom change message image cm (in this embodiment, when any sub-command of the pattern type designation command, the variation mode designation command, and the variation pattern designation command is received), the display of the custom change message image cm is not terminated accordingly (see FIG. 85 (a) → (c)). In this case, the display of the custom change message image cm continues even during the variation display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 (during the variation display of the special pattern). Then, when a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the display of the custom change message image cm, the display of the custom change message image cm is terminated accordingly (see FIG. 85 (c) → (d)). At this time, the variation display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 is performed in response to the end of the display of the custom change message image cm.
Here, in this embodiment, if the above-mentioned specific display termination condition is met during the period from the start of the display of the custom change message image cm to the elapse of a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 10.0 [s]), in response to the establishment of the specific display termination condition, the display of the custom change message image cm is terminated, and the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition is commenced.

(Third custom state)
The third custom state is set during execution of a special game.
In this embodiment, the third custom state is always set during the execution of the special game. That is, the third custom state is always set during the period when the notification display (variable display and stationary display) of the special symbol is being executed and during the period when the big win game state is occurring.
In the third custom state, it is possible to change the light intensity setting by pressing the light intensity adjustment button, and in the third custom state, it is possible to change the volume setting by pressing the volume adjustment button.
In addition, during the third customization state, it is possible to change the customization content for some of the above-mentioned effect customization types by using a shortcut function. In this embodiment, it is possible to change the customization content for "AUTO BUTTON PUSH", "TREBLE CUT MODE ON/OFF", and "PREMIUM UP CUSTOM" among the above-mentioned effect customization types by using a shortcut function during the third customization state.

Specifically, in the third custom state, in response to detection of pressing of the light intensity adjustment button, display of the light intensity setting image im1 is started. Then, when pressing of the light intensity adjustment button is detected while the light intensity setting image im1 is being displayed, the settings of the light intensity setting are changed in response to this.
Furthermore, during the third custom state, in response to detection of a pressing operation of the volume adjustment button, display of the volume setting image im2 begins. Then, when a pressing operation of the volume adjustment button is detected while the volume setting image im2 is being displayed, the settings of the volume setting are changed in response to this.

Furthermore, when a press of the left button is detected during the third custom state, a shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed on the display screen 31a in response.
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed, each time a press of the left or right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" ...), and the information stored in the third area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is displayed and the duration of the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected reaches a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment), the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to "treble cut mode ON/OFF" is accordingly terminated on the display screen 31a.

On the other hand, when a press of the up button is detected during the third custom state, in response, a shortcut window SW corresponding to "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed, each time a press operation of the left key button or the right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "ON" → "OFF" → "ON" → "OFF" ...), and the information stored in the second area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is displayed, if the duration of the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected reaches a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment), the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to the "AUTO BUTTON PUSH" is accordingly terminated on the display screen 31a.

On the other hand, when a press operation of the right button is detected during the third custom state, in response thereto, a shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is displayed on the display screen 31a.
Then, while the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Customization" is displayed, each time a press operation of the left key button or the right key button is detected, the custom content indicated by the custom content display is changed in a predetermined order (in this embodiment, "default" → "low frequency of occurrence" → "medium frequency of occurrence" → "high frequency of occurrence" → "default" ...), and the information stored in a sixth area included in the custom information storage area is updated to information specifying the custom content indicated by the custom content display.
When the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is displayed, if the duration of the state in which no operation of the left key button and the right key button is detected reaches a predetermined time (1.5 seconds in this embodiment), the display of the shortcut window SW corresponding to "Premium Up Custom" is accordingly terminated on the display screen 31a.

On the other hand, if a press of the down button is detected during the third custom state, the third custom state is ended and the fourth custom state is started.

(Fourth custom state)
The fourth custom state is set during execution of a special game.
As described above, when a press of the down button is detected during the third custom state, the fourth custom state is initiated.
During the fourth custom state, a second custom interface image IF2 is displayed on the display screen 31a.
At this time, the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed in a layer higher than the first performance symbol z1 (near side/front side). In particular, the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed at a position that does not cover (conceal) at least the first performance symbol z1 that is stopped and displayed.

During the fourth customization state, the type of effect customization that allows the customization content to be changed changes depending on the game state.
In other words, during the special chart low probability state, it is possible to change the customization contents for "Custom initialization,""Auto button push,""Treble cut mode ON/OFF,""Low probability pre-reading frequency customization," and "Premium up customization."
On the other hand, during the special chart high probability state, it is possible to change the customization contents for "Custom initialization", "Auto button push", "Treble cut mode ON/OFF", "High probability pre-reading frequency customization" and "Premium up customization".
On the other hand, during a jackpot game state, it is possible to change the customization contents of "Custom Initialization", "Auto Button PUSH", "Treble Cut Mode ON/OFF" and "Premium Up Customization".

Specifically, in response to the start of the fourth custom state, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 begins on the display screen 31a.
The method of changing the customization content of each performance custom type while the fourth custom state is occurring (while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed) is the same as the method of changing the customization content of each performance custom type while the second custom state is occurring (while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed).
That is, while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, it is possible to select the customization content for each effect customization type by pressing the cross key button.
Here, in this embodiment, even if custom content is selected for each effect custom type by pressing the directional pad buttons, the selected custom content will not be confirmed and will not be reflected in the custom information storage area unless the pressing of effect button 5b is detected.

When a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is accordingly terminated on the display screen 31a, and the fourth custom state is terminated.
In addition, when a press operation of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, in response to this, it is determined whether or not the custom content indicated by the information stored in the custom information storage area (internally set custom content) matches the custom content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 for all effect custom types.
Then, when it is determined that the custom content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 differs from the custom content (internally set custom content) indicated by the information stored in the custom information storage area for at least one performance customization type, the above-mentioned custom information storage area update process is executed, and the display of the custom change message image cm is started on the display screen 31a in response to the end of the display of the second custom interface image IF2 (end of the fourth custom state).
On the other hand, if it is determined that the customization content selected in the second custom interface image IF2 does not differ from the customization content (internally set customization content) indicated by the information stored in the customization information storage area for all effect customization types, the customization information storage area update process is not executed. In other words, if there is no changed effect customization type, the customization information storage area update process is not executed. In this case, in response to detection of a press operation of the effect button 5b, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is terminated on the display screen 31a (the fourth custom state is terminated), and the customization change message image cm is not displayed.

Specifically, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when a changed effect custom type exists), the fourth custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition to the third custom state is made. In particular, when a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when a changed effect custom type exists), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended on the display screen 31a accordingly, and the display of the custom message image cm is started (see Figures 86 (a)->(b)).
On the other hand, if a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when there is no changed effect custom type), the fourth custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to the third custom state. In particular, if a press of the effect button 5b is detected while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (when there is no changed effect custom type), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 on the display screen 31a is ended accordingly, and the display returns to the display of an image corresponding to a special game (not shown).
Furthermore, if the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, the fourth custom state is ended accordingly. At this time, a transition is made to the third custom state. If the duration of a no-operation state reaches a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended accordingly, and a return is made to the display of an image corresponding to a special game (see FIG. 86 (a)->(c)).
Furthermore, if a customer waiting state is initiated while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (in this embodiment, when a demo designation command is received), the fourth custom state is ended in response. At this time, a transition is made to the customer waiting state. In particular, if a customer waiting state is initiated while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed (in this embodiment, when a demo designation command is received), the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is ended in response, and the display of an image corresponding to the customer waiting state is started (see FIG. 86 (a)->(d)).
In addition, if the above-mentioned specific display termination condition is met while the second custom interface image IF2 is being displayed, the display of the second custom interface image IF2 is terminated in response to the establishment of the specific display condition, and the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a specific abnormal state is commenced.

The display of the custom change message image cm is ended when a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed since its start. In particular, even if a customer waiting state is started during the display of the custom change message image cm (when a demo designation command is received in this embodiment), the display of the custom change message image cm is not ended in response to this, but continues until the predetermined time has elapsed.
Specifically, when a predetermined time (10.0 [s] in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the display of the custom change message image cm, the display of the custom change message image cm is ended accordingly (see FIG. 87(a)→(b)). At this time, in response to the end of the display of the custom change message image cm, the display returns to the image corresponding to the special game.
On the other hand, even if the customer waiting state starts (in this embodiment, when a demo designation command is received) before a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 10.0 [s]) has elapsed since the start of the display of the custom change message image cm, the display of the custom change message image cm is not terminated accordingly (see FIG. 87(a)→(c)). In this case, the display of the custom change message image cm continues even during the customer waiting state. Then, when a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 10.0 [s]) has elapsed since the start of the display of the custom change message image cm, the display of the custom change message image cm is terminated accordingly (see FIG. 87(c)→(d)). At this time, in response to the end of the display of the custom change message image cm, an image corresponding to the customer waiting state is displayed.
Here, in this embodiment, if the above-mentioned specific display termination condition is met during the period from the start of the display of the custom change message image cm to the elapse of a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 10.0 [s]), in response to the establishment of the specific display termination condition, the display of the custom change message image cm is terminated, and the display of an image notifying the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition is commenced.

(Initialize custom content)
When the cross key button is pressed to select "YES" as the custom content for "Custom Initialization" while the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed, and when effect button 5b is pressed, the display of an initialization confirmation image starts, replacing the display of second custom interface image IF2. Then, when the initialization confirmation image is displayed, if initialization of the custom content is selected by pressing the cross key button and effect button 5b, the custom content for all effect custom types is initialized (returned to the initial state).
Furthermore, when the duration of no operation during the waiting state reaches a predetermined time (30.0 [s] in this embodiment), an initialization confirmation image starts to be displayed accordingly. Then, when the initialization confirmation image is displayed, if initialization of the customization contents is selected by pressing the cross key button and the effect button 5b, the customization contents for all effect customization types are initialized (returned to the initial state).
As described above, when the custom content is initialized, in the first area of the custom information storage area, information specifying custom content = "NO" is stored (set), in the second area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the third area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the fourth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), in the fifth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), and in the sixth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set).

(Processing executed on the performance control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
In this embodiment, the command reception interrupt process, the sub timer interrupt process, and the movable body interrupt process described later are interrupt processes executed by an interrupt handler, while the Vsync interrupt process, the sound interrupt process, and the lamp interrupt process described later are interrupt processes (tasks) that can be executed in parallel at the same time by multitasking.
Here, the Vsync interrupt process, the sound interrupt process, and the lamp interrupt process may also be configured as interrupt processes executed by an interrupt handler.

(Sub-CPU initialization process)
First, the sub-CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the sub-CPU initialization process.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the performance control board 300. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the reset circuit generates a reset signal.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sub-CPU initialization process shown in FIG. 38 in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the sub-CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S28-1.
In step S28-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-2. In the initial setting process, various initial settings required to start performance control are executed.
Specifically, in the initialization process, various registers, timers, and the like used by the CPU 310 are initialized to initialize the CPU 310 .
In addition, the initialization process initializes various internal devices (CPU work memory 311, CPU interface 312, host interface 313, CG bus interface 314, DRAM interface 315, VRAM 316, serial communication controller 317, transfer circuit 318, preloader circuit 319, display circuit 320, graphics decoder circuit 321, drawing circuit 322, sound circuit 323, etc.).
In particular, at this time, the value of the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register is initialized. As a result, a value (specifically, "0") designating the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter" is set in the post-effector frequency correction parameter number register. As a result, the post-effector 360 subsequently performs frequency correction on the audio data of each channel in accordance with the "normal post-effector frequency correction parameter".
In addition, in the initialization process, various external devices (control ROM 302, CGROM 303, DRAM 304, etc.) are initialized. At this time, a value (in this embodiment, "0") designating a state in which an initial transfer, which will be described later, is not completed is set in an initial transfer completion flag area of DRAM 304. Also, a value (specifically, "0") designating a "normal frequency correction parameter" is set in each frequency correction parameter number setting area (frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 to frequency correction parameter number setting area 3) of DRAM 304.
Furthermore, in the custom information storage area, in the first area, information specifying custom content = "NO" is stored (set), in the second area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the third area, information specifying custom content = "OFF" is stored (set), in the fourth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), in the fifth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set), and in the sixth area, information specifying custom content = "default" is stored (set).

In step S28-2, a material replacement offset setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3, which will be described later.
In step S28-3, an initial transfer data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-4. In the initial transfer data setting process, information specifying data to be the subject of initial transfer is set.
Specifically, in the initial transfer data setting process, the initial transfer data list is set in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304, and a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the data transfer counter.
The "initial transfer data list" is a list of data to be transferred (preloaded) from CGROM 303 to the preload area of DRAM 304 when power is turned on. In this embodiment, the initial transfer data list specifies all compressed audio data among the data stored in CGROM 303 as data to be transferred.
Specifically, the initial transfer data list registers, for all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303, the correspondence between information specifying the address of the memory area (memory area of CGROM 303) from which each compressed audio data is read (hereinafter referred to as the "read address"), information specifying the address of the memory area (memory area of DRAM 304) to which the compressed audio data is written (hereinafter referred to as the "write address"), and information specifying the order in which the compressed audio data is to be transferred (specifically, the value of the data transfer counter).

In step S28-4, a digital amplifier setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-5. In the digital amplifier setting process, the digital amplifier 305 is initially set.
Specifically, in the digital amplifier setting process, first, a reset signal is sent to the digital amplifier 305 (a signal input to a reset terminal is turned on). As a result, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting units 1, 2, and 3), registers related to volume setting (correction), registers related to terminal setting, status information setting register, etc.) in the digital amplifier 305 are initialized (cleared). At this time, a value corresponding to a normal state (specifically, "0") is set in the status information setting register.
In the digital amplifier setting process, next, the “normal frequency correction parameters” (“normal frequency correction parameter 1” to “normal frequency correction parameter 3”) are transmitted to the digital amplifier 305 .
As a result, a "normal state frequency correction parameter" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305. That is, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 1" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1, a "normal state frequency correction parameter 2" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2, and a "normal state frequency correction parameter 3" is set in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, frequency correction is then performed on the audio data of channels 1 and 2 (upper left speaker and upper right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 1", frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channels 3 and 4 (center left speaker and center right speaker) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 2", and frequency correction is performed on the audio data of channel 5 (woofer) in accordance with "normal frequency correction parameter 3".

In step S28-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released, and the execution of various interrupt processes becomes possible (permitted).
In step S28-6, a random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-7. In the random number update process, various random numbers for effect are updated.
In step S28-7, an initial transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-8, which will be described later.

In step S28-8, a status acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-9. In the status information acquisition process, the status information set in the status information setting register of the digital amplifier 305 is acquired.
In step S28-9, it is determined whether the status information acquired in step S28-8 is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (specifically, "1"), and if it is determined that the acquired status information is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-10, and if it is determined that the acquired status information is not a value corresponding to an abnormal state (it is a value corresponding to a normal state) (No), the process proceeds to step S28-6.
In step S28-10, a digital amplifier reset process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-11. In the digital amplifier reset process, a reset signal is sent to the digital amplifier 305 (the signal input to the reset terminal of the digital amplifier 305 is set to the ON state).
As a result, in the digital amplifier 305, various registers (frequency correction parameter setting registers (frequency correction parameter setting units 1, 2, and 3), registers related to volume setting (correction), registers related to terminal setting, status information setting registers, etc.) are initialized (cleared). At this time, a value corresponding to a normal state (specifically, "0") is set in the status information setting register.

In step S28-11, a parameter recovery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-6. In the parameter recovery process, the value of the frequency correction parameter setting register of the digital amplifier 305 is recovered based on the value set in the frequency correction parameter number setting area of the DRAM 304.
Specifically, in the parameter recovery process, first, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
Next, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is read from the control ROM 302 and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.
Next, the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 of the DRAM 304 is confirmed. Then, the frequency correction parameter corresponding to the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is read from the control ROM 302, and the read frequency correction parameter is transmitted to the digital amplifier 305.

As a result, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "0", the "normal time frequency correction parameter 1" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "normal time frequency correction parameter 1" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "1", the "jackpot time frequency correction parameter 1" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "jackpot time frequency correction parameter 1" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 1 is "2", the "time-saving time frequency correction parameter 1" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "time-saving time frequency correction parameter 1" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 1.
Also, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "0", the "normal time-frequency correction parameter 2" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "normal time-frequency correction parameter 2" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "1", the "jackpot time-frequency correction parameter 2" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "jackpot time-frequency correction parameter 2" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 2 is "2", the "time-saving time-frequency correction parameter 2" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "time-saving time-frequency correction parameter 2" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 2.
Also, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "0", the "normal time frequency correction parameter 3" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "normal time frequency correction parameter 3" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "1", the "jackpot time frequency correction parameter 3" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "jackpot time frequency correction parameter 3" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3. On the other hand, when the value of the frequency correction parameter number setting area 3 is "2", the "time-saving time frequency correction parameter 3" is sent to the digital amplifier 305, and the "time-saving time frequency correction parameter 3" is restored in the frequency correction parameter setting unit 3.

Next, the material replacement offset setting process in step S28-2 will be described.
FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the material replacement offset setting process.
When the material replacement offset setting process is executed in step S28-2, the process proceeds to step S45-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S45-1, a first model determination bit data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-2. In the first model determination bit data acquisition process, the first model determination bit data is acquired. Specifically, the 4-bit data (first model determination bit data) stored in the four reception memory areas ma, mb, mc, and md is acquired.
In step S45-2, it is determined whether the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A", and if it is determined that it is "decorative unit A" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-3, and if it is determined that it is not "decorative unit A" (No), it proceeds to step S45-4.
In this case, if the first model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area ma = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas mb, mc, md = "0", it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit A", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "decorative unit A".
In step S45-3, a value corresponding to "decorative unit A"("0" in this embodiment) is set as the first material replacement offset value in the first material replacement offset storage area, and the process proceeds to step S45-11.

In step S45-4, it is determined whether the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B", and if it is determined that it is "decorative unit B" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-5, and if it is determined that it is not "decorative unit B" (No), it proceeds to step S45-6.
In this case, if the first model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area mb = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas ma, mc, md = "0", it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit B", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "decorative unit B".
In step S45-5, a value corresponding to "decorative unit B"("1" in this embodiment) is set as the first material replacement offset value in the first material replacement offset storage area, and the process proceeds to step S45-11.

In step S45-6, it is determined whether the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is a "decorative unit C", and if it is determined that it is a "decorative unit C" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-7, and if it is determined that it is not a "decorative unit C" (No), it proceeds to step S45-8.
In this case, if the first model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area mc = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas ma, mb, md = "0", it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit C", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "decorative unit C".
In step S45-7, a value corresponding to "decorative unit C"("2" in this embodiment) is set as the first material replacement offset value in the first material replacement offset storage area, and the process proceeds to step S45-11.

In step S45-8, it is determined whether the type of decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is a "decorative unit D", and if it is determined that it is a "decorative unit D" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-9, and if it is determined that it is not a "decorative unit D" (No), it proceeds to step S45-10.
In this case, if the first model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area md = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas ma, mb, mc = "0", it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "decorative unit D", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the decorative unit DU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "decorative unit D".
In step S45-9, a value corresponding to "decorative unit D"("3" in this embodiment) is set as the first material replacement offset value in the first material replacement offset storage area, and the process proceeds to step S45-11.
In step S45-10, an error setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-11. In the error setting process, notification of an abnormal state is started (set). Specifically, on the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, display of information indicating that the attachment of the ornamental unit DU to the front frame unit 4 is incomplete is started (set).

In step S45-11, a second model determination bit data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S45-12. In the second model determination bit data acquisition process, second model determination bit data is acquired. Specifically, 4-bit data (second model determination bit data) stored in the four reception memory areas me, mf, mg, and mh is acquired.
In step S45-12, it is determined whether the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A" or not, and if it is determined that it is "receiving tray unit A" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-13, and if it is determined that it is not "receiving tray unit A" (No), it proceeds to step S45-14.
In this case, if the second model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area me = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas mf, mg, mh = "0", it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit A", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "receiving tray unit A".
In step S45-13, in the second material replacement offset memory area, a value corresponding to the "receiving tray unit A" (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the second material replacement offset value, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3).

In step S45-14, it is determined whether the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B" or not, and if it is determined that it is "receiving tray unit B" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S45-15, and if it is determined that it is not "receiving tray unit B" (No), the process proceeds to step S45-16.
In this case, if the second model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area mf = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas me, mg, mh = "0", it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit B", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "receiving tray unit B".
In step S45-15, in the second material replacement offset memory area, a value corresponding to the “receiving tray unit B” (in this embodiment, “1”) is set as the second material replacement offset value, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3).

In step S45-16, it is determined whether the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is a "receiving tray unit C" or not, and if it is determined that it is a "receiving tray unit C" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S45-17, and if it is determined that it is not a "receiving tray unit C" (No), the process proceeds to step S45-18.
In this case, if the second model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area mg = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas me, mf, mh = "0", it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit C", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "receiving tray unit C".
In step S45-17, in the second material replacement offset memory area, a value corresponding to the "receiving tray unit C" (in this embodiment, "2") is set as the second material replacement offset value, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3).

In step S45-18, it is determined whether the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D" or not, and if it is determined that it is "receiving tray unit D" (Yes), it proceeds to step S45-19, and if it is determined that it is not "receiving tray unit D" (No), it proceeds to step S45-20.
In this case, if the second model determination bit data (4 bits) has a combination of the bit value corresponding to the receiving memory area mh = "1" and the bit values corresponding to the receiving memory areas me, mf, mg = "0", it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is "receiving tray unit D", and if there is any other combination, it is determined that the type of the receiving tray unit SU attached to the front frame unit 4 is not "receiving tray unit D".
In step S45-19, in the second material replacement offset memory area, a value corresponding to the "receiving tray unit D" (in this embodiment, "3") is set as the second material replacement offset value, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3).
In step S45-20, an error setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-3). In the error setting process, notification of an abnormal state is started (set). Specifically, on the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31, display of information indicating that the attachment of the receiving tray unit SU to the front frame unit 4 is incomplete is started (set).

(Initial transfer process)
Next, the initial transfer process of step S28-7 will be described.
FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the initial transfer process.
When the initial transfer process is executed in step S28-7, the process proceeds to step S44-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S44-1, it is determined whether the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S44-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-8).

In step S44-2, a SATA transfer process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S44-3. In the SATA transfer process, the data stored in the CGROM 303 is transferred (preloaded) to the preload area of the DRAM 304 in accordance with the initial transfer data list set in step S28-1.
Specifically, in the SATA transfer process, first, the value of the data transfer counter is confirmed. Next, the initial transfer data list is referenced to obtain the read address and write address corresponding to the confirmed value of the data transfer counter. Then, data (compressed audio data) stored in the memory area specified by the obtained read data address is read, and the read data (compressed image data) is stored in the memory area specified by the obtained write address.
In the SATA transfer process, next, the data transfer counter value is incremented by "1".

In step S44-3, it is determined whether the initial transfer has been completed. If it is determined that the initial transfer has been completed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S44-4. If it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-8).
Here, in step S44-3, it is determined whether or not the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has been completed based on the value of the data transfer counter. If it is determined that the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has been completed, and if it is determined that the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list has not been completed, it is determined that the initial transfer has not been completed.
In step S44-4, an initial transfer completion flag setting process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S28-8). In the initial transfer completion flag setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "1") designating a state in which the initial transfer is completed is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.

As a result, during the period from the execution of the initial setting process to the completion of the transfer (initial transfer) of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303), "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area. During the period in which "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, the SATA transfer process of step S44-2 is repeatedly executed.
Thereafter, when the transfer (initial transfer) of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303) is completed, "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area.
In particular, in this embodiment, in response to "1" being set in the initial transfer completion flag area, a state is created in which it is possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323) and control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
In other words, when "0" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, it becomes impossible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323) and to control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
On the other hand, when "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area, it becomes possible to control the output of audio from the various speakers 22 (audio output processing by the sound circuit 323) and to control the display of performance images by the various image display devices 31, 32 (drawing processing by the VDP).
On the other hand, in this embodiment, before the transfer of all data registered in the initial transfer data list (all compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303) is completed (before "1" is set in the initial transfer completion flag area), a state occurs in which it is possible to control the drive (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp drive processing by lamp controller 317a) and the drive control of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive processing by motor controller 317b).
In other words, after the initial setting process is executed, various interrupt processes are permitted to be executed, and thus a state is created in which it is possible to control the drive (light emission) of the various lamps 20, 21 (lamp drive process by lamp controller 317a) and the drive of the various motors 23 (various movable bodies) (motor drive process by motor controller 317b).

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt processing, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored in the reception buffer area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The performance control board 300 includes a clock generating circuit. The clock generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sub timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 40 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of a clock pulse by the clock generating circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2. In the register save process, the register values are saved to a save area in the DRAM 304.

In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, the values of various timers (such as performance scenario timers) equipped in the performance control board 300 are updated. Specifically, a predetermined value (a value corresponding to a predetermined period) is added or subtracted from the values of the various timers.
In step S31-3, a command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the reception buffer of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is analyzed, and a process according to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of the presentation is managed based on the presentation scenario data set in the presentation scenario setting area and the value of the presentation scenario timer corresponding to the presentation scenario data.
Specifically, in the time schedule management process, for each rendering scenario data set in the rendering scenario setting area, it is determined whether or not there is process data whose start time has arrived. If it is determined that there is process data whose start time has arrived, each command information (message) included in the process data is stored (stored) in the corresponding buffer area.
At this time, command information relating to the display performance (command information for specifying the start of the display performance, command information for specifying the end of the display performance, etc.) is stored in a display command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information relating to sound performance (such as command information for specifying the start of sound performance) is stored in a sound command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding lamp performance (such as command information for specifying the start of a lamp performance) is stored in a lamp command buffer area.
On the other hand, command information regarding the movable body performance (such as command information specifying the start of the movable body performance) is stored in a movable body command buffer area.

In step S31-5, the register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a setting value command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a setting value designation command has been received. If it is determined that a setting value designation command has been received, a value corresponding to the setting value designated by the setting value designation command is stored (set) in the setting value storage area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game status command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a hold command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4, which will be described later.
In step S32-4, a read-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5, which will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6, which will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7, which will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-8, which will be described later.

In step S32-8, a game play status command receiving process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In the game status command reception process, first, it is determined whether or not a game status designation command has been received. If it is determined that the game status designation command has been received, a game status setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the game status designation command has not been received, the game status setting process is not executed and the process proceeds to the next step (step S31-4).
In the game status setting process, the game status designation command is analyzed.
Then, when the occurrence of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "1") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, a performance is started that suggests (notifies) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring.
On the other hand, when the release of the ready-to-fire state is specified by the game status specification command, a value (for example, "0") specifying that the ready-to-fire state is being released is set in the game status flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Also, the performance suggesting (notifying) that the ready-to-fire state is occurring is terminated.

(Pending command reception process)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the pending command receiving process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (the pending number has increased by "1"), and if it is determined that the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the pending number specification command does not specify an increase in the pending number (specifies that the pending number has decreased by "1") (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the reserved number addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is added with "1" and set as a new reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 1 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b2, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the reserved number counter for special pattern 1.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies an increase in the reserved number of special chart 2, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2 plus "1" is set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2. In addition, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 2 game information is started.
At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, among the four display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b3, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is set. Here, the memory area (memory area 1 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number specification command specifies subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position in the reserved pattern display area b2 corresponding to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b2 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special figures 2, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b3 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved symbol h displayed in the reserved symbol display area b1 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when a reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position in the reserved pattern display area b3 corresponding to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the reserved pattern display area b3 (the display position corresponding to memory area 1) to the reserved pattern display area b1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 2 to the display position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 3 to the display position corresponding to memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a display position corresponding to memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b3, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the display position corresponding to memory area 4 to the display position corresponding to memory area 3.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the read-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead command reception process.
When the read-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a read-ahead designation command (first read-ahead designation command, second read-ahead designation command, and third read-ahead designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information designated by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 as reserved information.
A reserved information storage area capable of storing reserved information is set in the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. In addition, as the reserved information storage area, a first reserved information storage area corresponding to the first special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 game information storage area of the RAM 230) and a second reserved information storage area corresponding to the second special symbol lottery (special symbol 2 game information storage area of the RAM 230) are set.
The first reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The first reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the first reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 1 game information storage area.
The second reserved information storage area includes storage areas 1 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing reserved information. The second reserved information storage area stores reserved information corresponding to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area. That is, the reserved information stored in storage area 1 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 2 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 2 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 3 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 3 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The reserved information stored in storage area 4 of the second reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in storage area 4 of the special chart 2 game information storage area.
Each pending information includes pattern information indicating the type of stopping pattern, first variation information indicating the content of the variation mode ("variation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and second variation information indicating the content of the variation pattern ("variation pattern number" or "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.The generated reserved information is then stored (saved) in the first reserved information storage area.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol" or "jackpot p symbol"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode m" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern n" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and reserved information is generated that includes symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, first fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation mode, and second fluctuation information corresponding to the content of the analyzed fluctuation pattern.Then, the generated reserved information is stored (saved) in the second reserved information storage area.
In the following description, the pending information stored in the pending information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as “pre-read pending information.” In addition, among the pending information stored in the first pending information storage area, the pending information for which notification display (variable display and stationary display) is executed before the pending information to be pre-read is referred to as “advancing pending information.”

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is being executed, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, while the pre-reading preview performance is being executed, "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance in-progress flag area.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "2") or more of advance pending information is stored, (2) there is no advance pending information indicating a type (fluctuation pattern number) belonging to "normal reach fluctuation" or "super reach fluctuation" as a fluctuation pattern type, and (3) a jackpot game state is not occurring.
The contents of the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. That is, it is acceptable to have a configuration in which it is determined that the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions are met when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (3) are met, rather than all of the above conditions (1) to (3). In addition, the pre-reading notice performance execution conditions may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (3). As other conditions, for example, it is possible to specify that (4) the pre-reading target reserved information is reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information, (5) the time-saving control is stopped, etc.

In step S33-5, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading notice performance lottery process, first, the reserved notice appearance designation information stored in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area is confirmed. Then, if non-appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is not executed (it is decided not to execute the pre-reading notice performance). On the other hand, if appearance designation information is set in the reserved notice appearance designation information setting area, the pre-reading notice performance lottery is executed.
In the pre-reading notice performance lottery, first, a pre-reading notice performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number and the pre-reading notice performance lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. At this time, if the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number matches the winning value (win), it is determined to execute the pre-reading notice performance, and if the obtained pre-reading notice performance lottery random number does not match the winning value (lose), it is determined not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been lost (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-7, a pre-reading advance notice effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, the contents of the pre-reading advance notice effect (hold advance notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading preview performance setting process, first, a reserved final mode selection process is executed. In the reserved final mode selection process, a reserved final mode is selected and set.
"Final reserved state" refers to the state of the reserved pattern hy that is the subject of the notice and that ultimately changes during the reserved notice performance.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve final color lottery table in which the correspondence between the reserve final mode lottery random numbers and the reserve final modes is registered.
In addition, a reservation final mode lottery table corresponding to each type of fluctuation pattern is stored as a reservation final mode lottery table.
In the reserved final mode selection process, first, a reserved final mode selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the variation pattern indicated by the reserved information to be read ahead is confirmed, and the reserved final mode selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the acquired reserved final mode selection random number and the read reserved final mode selection table, the reserved final mode is selected (determined).

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change trigger selection process is executed. In the reserved change trigger selection process, a reserved change trigger is selected and set.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserve change trigger lottery table in which the correspondence between reserve change trigger lottery random numbers and reserve change patterns is registered.
"Pending change pattern" is information (scenario data) that specifies a combination of pending change triggers.
In addition, a reserve change trigger lottery table corresponding to each combination of the special chart 1 reserve number ("2" to "4") and the reserve final state is stored as a reserve change trigger lottery table.
In the reservation change opportunity selection process, first, a reservation change opportunity lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the reservation number of the special chart 1 and the reservation final mode selected in the reservation final mode selection process are confirmed, and the reservation change opportunity lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the reservation change opportunity lottery random number obtained and the reservation change opportunity lottery table read, a reservation notice performance number is determined (determined). Then, the performance scenario data corresponding to the determined reservation notice performance number is read, and the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario area.

In the pre-reading advance notice performance setting process, next, a reserved change content selection process is executed. In the reserved change content selection process, reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger is selected and set.
Specifically, in the reserved change content selection process, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted before the change and the state of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted after the change are set as the reserved change content corresponding to each reserved change trigger.
In this embodiment, of the one or more hold change triggers set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change content corresponding to each hold change trigger is selected in order from the hold change trigger that arrives (occurs) later (later hold change trigger).
For example, if three hold change triggers are set in the hold change trigger selection process, the hold change contents corresponding to each hold change trigger are selected in the following order: the third (final) hold change trigger, the second hold change trigger, and the first hold change trigger.
In addition, when selecting the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change is selected, and then the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change is selected. At this time, as the state of the reserved pattern hy before the change, a state with a lower expectation is determined compared to the state of the reserved pattern hy after the change. As a result, in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger, the state of the reserved pattern hy with the predicted target is changed (promoted) to a state with a higher expectation.
A control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a reserved change content selection table in which the correspondence between the reserved change content selection random number and the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change is registered.
In addition, a reserved change content selection table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change) is stored as a reserved change content selection table.
In the reserved change content lottery table corresponding to each state of the reserved pattern h (the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change), only states of the predicted reserved pattern hy before the change that have a lower expectation level compared to the state of the predicted reserved pattern hy after the change are registered.
In the reserved change content selection process, first, the reserved change content is selected for the last reserved change trigger among the reserved change triggers set in the reserved change trigger selection process. For this, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. At this time, the reserved final state selected in the reserved final state selection process is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the reserved change trigger of the last time is read. Then, based on the reserved change content lottery random number obtained and the reserved change content lottery table read, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the reserved change trigger of the last time is selected.
In the reservation change content selection process, next, the reservation change content is selected for each reservation change trigger, excluding the last reservation change trigger, from among the reservation change triggers set in the reservation change trigger selection process. At this time, the reservation change content corresponding to each reservation change trigger is determined in order from the reservation change trigger that arrives last.
To determine the reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger, first, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the reserved change trigger is determined. At this time, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change already selected for the next reserved change trigger is selected as the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change related to the current reserved change trigger. Next, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is determined. For this, first, a reserved change content lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, a reserved change content lottery table corresponding to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified after the change selected for the current reserved change trigger is read. Then, based on the obtained reserved change content lottery random number and the read reserved change content lottery table, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified before the change related to the current reserved change trigger is selected.
In the reserved change content selection process, the reserved change content selected for each reserved change opportunity is then set in the area corresponding to the reserved change opportunity in the performance scenario setting area. As a result, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes (promotion) according to the reserved change content set for the reserved change opportunity in response to the arrival of each reserved change opportunity.

In the pre-reading preview performance setting process, next, the pre-reading preview performance in progress flag area of the DRAM 304 of the performance control board 300 is set to "1".
This will start the hold notification performance.
In addition, through processing not shown, the pre-reading preview performance flag area is set to "0" upon the end of the hold preview performance.

(Variation command reception process)
Next, the variable command receiving process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the variable command receiving process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a specified control command has been received. If it is determined that the specified control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2. If it is determined that the specified control command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop pattern specified by the pattern type designation command. Then, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area of the DRAM 304 of the effect control board 300.

In step S34-3, a variable performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable performance determination process, a variable performance number (a mode of the variable performance) is determined.
Specifically, in the variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a first half variable performance number (aspect of the first half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the first half variable performance number (form of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance selection table is read. Then, a first half variable performance number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected) from among the first half variable performance numbers registered in the first half variable performance selection table.

In the variable performance determination process, next, a second half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a second half variable performance number (a mode of the second half variable performance).
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) and the second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the latter half variable performance determination process, first, a latter half variable performance selection table is read out. Then, a latter half variable performance number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected) from the latter half variable performance numbers registered in the latter half variable performance selection table.

In step S34-4, a preview performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the preview performance determination process, a main preview performance number (the mode of the main preview performance) is selected.
The control ROM 302 of the performance control board 300 stores a preview performance lottery table in which the correspondence between preview performance lottery random numbers and main preview performance numbers (modes of main preview performance) is registered.
In addition, as a preview performance lottery table, a preview performance lottery table corresponding to each stopping pattern number (each type of stopping pattern) is stored.
To determine the mode of the main preview performance, first, a preview performance selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the preview performance selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the main preview performance number is determined (determined) based on the obtained preview performance selection random number and the read preview performance selection table.

In step S34-5, a variable performance setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, performance scenario data for the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable performance setting process, the performance scenario data corresponding to the first half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 and the performance scenario data corresponding to the second half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 are read out.
Next, the read-out rendering scenario data is synthesized to generate rendering scenario data relating to variable rendering, and the generated rendering scenario data and a rendering scenario timer corresponding to the rendering scenario data are set in a rendering scenario setting area.
In addition, the performance scenario data corresponding to the main preview performance number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read performance scenario data and the performance scenario timer corresponding to the performance scenario data are set in the performance scenario setting area. This causes the main preview performance to start at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance.

(Stop command reception process)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect start process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect start process, effect scenario data for the stop effect is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area is acquired, and the effect scenario data corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read out. Then, the read-out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the stop effect (stop display of the effect patterns z1 and z2).

(Opening command reception process)
Next, the opening command receiving process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the opening command receiving process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that an opening designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-8). In the winning effect setting process, effect scenario data for the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, a winning effect number is selected according to the type of the stop symbol specified by the opening designation command. Also, the effect scenario data corresponding to the selected winning effect number is read out. Then, the read out effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data are set in the effect scenario setting area. This starts the winning effect.

(Vsync interrupt processing)
Next, the Vsync interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the Vsync interrupt process.
The synchronization signal generating circuit of the display circuit 320 generates a vertical synchronization signal (Vsync) at predetermined intervals (sets the vertical synchronization signal to high level).
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the Vsync interrupt process shown in Fig. 47 at every second predetermined period based on the generation of the vertical synchronization signal by the synchronization signal generating circuit. When the Vsync interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S40-1.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), it proceeds to step S40-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the Vsync interrupt processing is terminated.

In step S40-2, a frame buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the frame buffer switching process, the designation of the frame buffer area (designation of the drawing area/designation of the output area) is switched.
Specifically, in the frame buffer switching process, of the two frame buffer areas, the designation of the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area is switched from the drawing area to the output area, and the designation of the frame buffer area designated as the output area is switched from the output area to the drawing area.

In step S40-3, a drawing command buffer switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the drawing command buffer switching process, the designation of the drawing command buffer area (designation of a construction area/designation of a transfer area) is switched.
Specifically, in the drawing command buffer switching process, of the two drawing command buffer areas, the designation of the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area is switched from the construction area to the transfer area, and the designation of the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area is switched from the transfer area to the construction area.
In step S40-4, a drawing/output start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the drawing/output start process, the start of drawing process by drawing circuitry 322 is instructed, and the start of output process by display circuitry 320 is instructed.
Specifically, in the drawing/output start process, a value designating the start of drawing process is set in the drawing register of the microcomputer 301. This starts the drawing process by the drawing circuit 322. That is, the drawing circuit 322 starts generating drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer area designated as the drawing area, using compressed image data for one frame stored (preloaded) in the preload area of the DRAM 304.
In addition, in the drawing/output start process, a value designating the start of output process is set in the display register of the microcomputer 301. This starts the output process by the display circuit 320. That is, the display circuit 320 starts generating and outputting a video signal based on one frame's worth of drawing data generated in the frame buffer area designated as the output area.

In step S40-5, a drawing command transfer start process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-6. In the drawing command transfer start process, the start of a transfer process by the transfer circuit 318 is instructed, and the start of a preload process by the preloader circuit 319 is instructed.
Specifically, in the drawing command transfer start process, a value designating the start of a transfer process for transferring a display list to the preloader circuit 319 is set in the data transfer register of the microcomputer 301. This starts the transfer process by the transfer circuit 318. That is, the transfer circuit 318 starts transferring the display list generated in the drawing command buffer area designated as the transfer area for the preloader circuit 319.
In addition, in the drawing command transfer start process, a value specifying the start of the preload process is set in the display preloader register of the microcomputer 301. This starts the preload process by the preloader circuit 319. That is, the preloader circuit 319 starts the transfer (from the CGROM 303 to the preload area of the DRAM 304) of one frame of compressed image data specified in the display list (drawing command) transferred by the transfer circuit 318, and the rewriting of the display list (drawing command).

In step S40-6, the command construction task wake-up process is executed, and the Vsync interrupt process is terminated. In the command construction task wake-up process, the wake-up of the command construction task process is set. This starts the command construction task process described below.

(Command construction task processing)
Next, the command construction task processing started in step S40-6 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the command construction task processing.
When the command construction task process is woken up in step S40-6, the process proceeds to step S46-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S46-1, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the display command buffer area. If it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored (Yes), the process proceeds to step S46-2. If it is determined that unanalyzed command information is not stored (No), the process proceeds to step S46-3.
In step S46-2, a command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S46-1. In the command information analysis process, unanalyzed command information is analyzed, and a process according to the result of the analysis is executed.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, when the unanalyzed command information is command information that specifies the start of a display effect, first, from among the animation tables stored in the control ROM 302, an animation table corresponding to the display effect number specified by the command information is read. Then, in the animation table setting area of the DRAM 304, the read animation table, the frame rate corresponding to the animation table, and the display priority information corresponding to the animation table are set (stored and registered). At this time, the frame rate setting table is referenced to obtain a frame rate corresponding to the index number assigned to the animation table, and the obtained frame rate is set.
On the other hand, if the unanalyzed command information is command information specifying the end of the display performance, the animation table corresponding to the display performance number specified by the command information is cleared (erased) from among the animation tables set in the animation table setting area.

In step S46-3, a command construction process is executed, and the command construction task process is terminated. In the command construction process, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area.
Specifically, in the command construction process, first, a frame information update process is executed.
In the frame information update process, the frame information is updated for all animation tables set in the animation table setting area.
Specifically, in the frame information update process, for each animation table set in the animation table setting area, the next frame information in the order of priority is selected as the frame information for constructing a display list, replacing the currently selected frame information.
In the command construction process, next, a command construction process is executed.
In the command construction process, a display list is constructed in the drawing command buffer area designated as the construction area.
Specifically, in the command construction process, first, a drawing command is generated for each animation table set in the animation table setting area. To do this, frame information selected as a target for constructing a display list is obtained from the frame information defined in each animation table. Then, a drawing command is generated based on the obtained frame information.
Here, the drawing command specifies the image address of the image data to be used for drawing, the magnification (magnification ratio/reduction ratio) when the image data is drawn, the coordinates at which the image data is drawn (coordinates in the frame buffer area), the transmittance (transparency/transparency/transparency rate) when the image data is drawn, etc.
In the command construction process, the drawing commands generated for all the animation tables set in the animation table setting area are then arranged in a predetermined order to construct a display list.
At this time, the order of the drawing commands corresponding to each animation table is set based on the display priority information of each animation table set in the animation table setting area.
That is, the display list is constructed by arranging the multiple drawing commands such that the drawing process based on a drawing command with a lower display priority is executed first relative to a drawing command with a higher display priority. In other words, the display list is constructed by arranging the multiple drawing commands such that the drawing process based on a drawing command with a lower display priority is executed first.

(Sound interrupt processing)
Next, the sound interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the sound interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the sound interruption process shown in Fig. 49 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the sound interruption process starts, the process first proceeds to step S41-1.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1", and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is "1" (Yes), it proceeds to step S41-2, and if it is determined that the value set in the initial transfer completion flag area is not "1" (is "0") (No), the sound interrupt processing is terminated.

In step S41-2, a command information analysis process is executed, and the sound interrupt process is terminated. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the sound command buffer area, and if it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, a process corresponding to the unanalyzed command information is executed.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, a command list corresponding to the sound performance control number specified by the unanalyzed command information is read from the control ROM 302, and the read command list is set in the control register of the sound circuit 323. As a result, the sound circuit 323 operates according to the command list set in the control register.

(Lamp interrupt processing)
Next, the lamp interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the lamp interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the lamp interruption process shown in Fig. 50 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the lamp interruption process starts, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, a command information analysis process is executed, and the lamp interrupt process is terminated. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the lamp command buffer area, and if it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, a process corresponding to the unanalyzed command information is executed.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, if the unanalyzed command information is command information that specifies the start of a lamp performance, the compressed lamp drive data corresponding to the lamp performance number specified by the command information is read out, and the read compressed lamp drive data is set in the lamp register. As a result, the lamp controller 317a controls the lamp performance (the drive (lighting) of the various lamps 20, 21) according to the compressed lamp drive data set in the lamp register.

(Movable object interrupt processing)
Next, the movable body interrupt processing executed by the CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable body interrupt process.
The CPU 310 of the performance control board 300 starts the movable body interruption process shown in Fig. 51 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generation circuit. When the movable body interruption process starts, the process first proceeds to step S43-1.
In step S43-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-2. In the register save process, the register values are saved to a save area in the DRAM 304.
In step S43-2, a command information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S43-3. In the command information analysis process, it is determined whether or not unanalyzed command information is stored in the movable body command buffer area, and if it is determined that unanalyzed command information is stored, a process corresponding to the unanalyzed command information is executed.
Specifically, in the command information analysis process, if the unanalyzed command information is command information that specifies the start of a moving body performance, the compressed motor drive data specified by the command information is read out and the read compressed motor drive data is set in the motor register. This causes the motor controller 317b to control the moving body performance (the drive of the various motors 23 (various moving bodies)) according to the compressed motor drive data set in the motor register.
In step S43-3, a register restoration process is executed, and the movable body interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S43-1 are restored.

(Function of Pachinko Machine 1)
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute effects ("specific super reach variation effects" and "button advance notice effects") according to the type of attached accessory parts (decorative unit DU and receptacle unit SU). This makes it possible to change the mode of the specific effects ("specific super reach variation effects" and "button advance notice effects") to modes according to the type of attached accessory parts (decorative unit DU and receptacle unit SU), making it possible to prevent a decrease in the effect of the specific effects.
Specifically, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a front frame unit 4 (front frame) to which any of a plurality of types of accessory parts (decorative unit DU, receiving tray unit SU) can be attached, a determination means (decorative unit detection switch 35, receiving tray unit detection switch 36) that determines the type of accessory parts (decorative unit DU, receiving tray unit SU) attached to the front frame unit 4 (front frame), and a performance control board 300 that can execute performances ("specific super reach variation performance" and "button preview performance") according to the type determined by the determination means (decorative unit detection switch 35, receiving tray unit detection switch 36).
This allows the pachinko machine 1 to determine the type of attached accessory parts (decorative unit DU, tray unit SU) and execute a performance corresponding to the determined type ("specific super reach variation performance" and "button advance notice performance"). Therefore, it becomes possible to change the mode of the specific performance ("specific super reach variation performance" and "button advance notice performance") to a mode corresponding to the type of attached accessory parts (decorative unit DU and tray unit SU), and it becomes possible to prevent a decrease in the performance effect of the specific performance ("specific super reach variation performance" and "button advance notice performance").

(Variation 1)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, in the above embodiment, the ducker 355 is set to reduce the volume of the audio bus 5 to which the lower speaker is connected, based on the input of the audio bus 8 to which no speaker is connected.
However, the ducker 355 may be set to reduce the volume of the audio bus 5 to which the lower speaker is connected, based on the input of the audio bus 6 to which the woofer is connected.
Even with this configuration, when the volume of the woofer exceeds a predetermined value, it is possible to suppress an increase in the total current consumption by the various speakers 22 by reducing the volume of the lower speaker without reducing the volume of the woofer.

(Variation 2)
In addition, in the above embodiment, the compressed audio data stored in the CGROM 303 is preloaded into a preload area of the DRAM 304, and sound effects are executed based on the compressed audio data preloaded into the preload area.
However, the compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303 may not be preloaded into the preload area of DRAM 304, and sound effects may be executed based on the compressed audio data stored in CGROM 303.

(Variation 3)
In the above embodiment, the tray unit SU is configured to include two trays (the upper tray 8 and the lower tray 9).
However, the tray unit SU may be configured to include one tray (only the upper tray 8).
With such a configuration, all game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the upper tray 8.
In particular, in addition to the first dispensing hole 8a and the first discharge hole 8b being provided in the wall surface on the rear side of the upper receiving tray 8, the second discharge hole 9b is provided in the bottom surface of the upper receiving tray 8.
The first payout hole 8a is provided at the upstream end of the upper tray 8 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the upper tray 8 from the first payout hole 8a.
The first discharge hole 8b is provided at the downstream end of the upper tray 8 (the downstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the upper tray 8 can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b to the outside of the upper tray 8 (specifically, to a coin box placed below the tray unit SU). Specifically, a game ball discharge port (not shown) is provided on the bottom surface of the tray unit SU. The first discharge hole 8b is connected to the game ball discharge port via a game ball discharge path (not shown) provided on the back side of the upper tray 8. As a result, the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 8b pass through the game ball discharge path and are discharged from the game ball discharge port into the coin box.
The second discharge hole 9b is provided at a position downstream of the first payout hole 8a and upstream of the first discharge hole 8b. In this modified example, the second discharge hole 9b is provided at the upstream end of the upper tray 8 (the upstream end of the path along which the game balls flow down). The game balls stored in the upper tray 8 can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the upper tray 8 (specifically, to a coin box placed below the tray unit SU). Specifically, the second discharge hole 9b is connected to the game ball discharge port through the game ball discharge path (not shown). As a result, the game balls discharged from the second discharge hole 9b pass through the game ball discharge path and are discharged from the game ball discharge port into the coin box.
As a result, in this modified example, game balls can be discharged from the upper tray 8 to the coin box through each of the first discharge hole 9b and the second discharge hole 9b. At this time, the game balls discharged from the first discharge hole 9b and the game balls discharged from the second discharge hole 9b both pass through the game ball discharge path and are discharged from the game ball discharge port into the coin box.
In addition, the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 may be configured to be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b or the second discharge hole 9b into the inside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a counting device that counts the game balls).

The configuration of the first discharge hole 8b is as described in the above embodiment. That is, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that allows the game balls to pass through (discharge) one by one. That is, the first discharge hole 8b is configured with a dimension that makes it impossible to pass through (discharge) two or more game balls at the same time.
The configuration of the second discharge hole 9b is as described in the above embodiment. The dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. This allows the second discharge hole 9b to pass more game balls simultaneously than the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the number of game balls that can pass through the second discharge hole 9b simultaneously is greater than the number of game balls that can pass through the first discharge hole 8b simultaneously. Specifically, the second discharge hole 9b is configured with dimensions that allow two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) to pass (discharge) simultaneously.

A first opening/closing member 80 capable of opening and closing the first discharge hole 8b is provided on the rear side of the upper receiving tray 8. The configuration of the first opening/closing member 80 is as described in the above embodiment. That is, the first opening/closing member 80 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The first opening/closing member 80 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from the closed position (see FIG. 57) to the maximum open position (see FIG. 59).
When the first opening/closing member 80 is disposed in the closed position, the first discharge hole 8b is closed by the opening/closing piece portion 82, and it is not possible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b.
When the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left (maximum open position) as viewed from the rear side, the closure of the first discharge hole 8b by the opening/closing piece 82 is gradually released, and the first discharge hole 8b is gradually opened. At this time, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 58), the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire first discharge hole 8b is opened.
That is, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the right (closed position side) of the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when viewed from the rear side, when the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned to the left (maximum open position side) of the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by positioning the first opening/closing member 80 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass (discharge).

A first ball removal button 85 is provided on the side of the upper tray 8. The configuration of the first ball removal button 85 is as described in the above embodiment. That is, the first ball removal button 85 includes an operating portion 85a and a pushing piece portion 85b. The first ball removal button 85 can be displaced (pushed in) in the vertical direction within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 57) to the lowest position (see FIG. 59).
When the operating portion 85a of the first ball removal button 85 is not operated, the first opening/closing member 80 is placed in the closed position and the first ball removal button 85 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are not discharged.
When the operating portion 85a is pressed downward from the state where the first ball removal button 85 is located in the initial position, the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position side) as viewed from the back side. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (amount of pressing) of the operating portion 85a, the greater the amount of displacement of the first opening/closing member 80, and as a result, the greater the amount of opening (opening width) of the first discharge hole 8b.
Then, when the first opening/closing member 80 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, when the first ball removal button 85 is positioned at a specific position by pushing in the operating portion 85a, the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned at the minimum open position, and game balls can pass through the first discharge hole 8b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the first discharge hole 8b.
As a result, when the first ball removal button 85 is located above the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the first discharge hole 8b. On the other hand, when the first ball removal button 85 is located below the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the first discharge hole 8b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the first ball removal button 85 at the specific position, the opening width of the first discharge hole 8b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (discharge).
Furthermore, when the first ball removal button 85 is pressed to the lowest position, the first opening/closing member 80 is positioned in the maximum open position.
Then, when the first ball removal button 85 is positioned at the lowest position and the operating portion 85a is stopped being pressed, the first opening/closing member 80 is returned to the closed position due to the deactivation of the coil spring sp, and the first ball removal button 85 is returned to its initial position.
As a result, by pressing the first ball removal button 85 (operation section 85a), the player can discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 through the first discharge hole 8b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to the dollar box placed below the tray unit SU).

A second opening/closing member 90 capable of opening and closing the second discharge hole 9b is provided on the bottom side of the upper receiving tray 8. The configuration of the second opening/closing member 90 is as described in the above embodiment. That is, the second opening/closing member 90 is an opening/closing member that is opened and closed non-electrically (manually) without using an actuator. The second opening/closing member 90 is capable of being displaced in the left-right direction within a range from the closed position (see FIG. 60) to the maximum open position (see FIG. 62).
When the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed in the closed position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is closed by the opening/closing plate portion 91, making it impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b.
When the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the maximum open position, the closing of the second discharge hole 9b by the opening/closing plate portion 91 is gradually released, and the second discharge hole 9b is gradually opened. At this time, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position (see FIG. 61), the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b becomes approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the minimum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) the game balls one by one from the second discharge hole 9b. Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, the entire second discharge hole 9b is opened. In particular, when the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the maximum open position, it is possible to pass (discharge) two or more game balls (five balls in this embodiment) simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
That is, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the closed position than the minimum open position, it is impossible for game balls to pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second opening/closing member 90 is disposed closer to the maximum open position than the minimum open position, game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by disposing the second opening/closing member 90 at the minimum open position, the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b is ensured to be the minimum opening width that allows game balls to pass through (be discharged).

A second ball removal button 95 is provided on the front of the upper tray 8. The configuration of the second ball removal button 95 is as described in the above embodiment. The second ball removal button 95 includes an operating portion 95a. The second ball removal button 95 can be displaced (pushed in) in the depth direction within a range from the initial position (see FIG. 60) to the lowest position (see FIG. 62).
When the operating portion 95a of the second ball removal button 95 is not operated, the second opening/closing member 90 is placed in the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 is placed in the initial position. Therefore, the game balls cannot pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are not discharged.
When the second ball removal button 95 is in the initial position and the operating portion 95a is pushed in toward the back, the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced from the closed position toward the left side (maximum open position) as viewed from below. At this time, the greater the amount of operation (push amount) of the operating portion 95a, the greater the amount of displacement of the second opening/closing member 90, and as a result, the greater the opening amount (opening width) of the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second opening/closing member 90 is displaced to the minimum open position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b. In other words, when the second ball removal button 95 is positioned at a specific position by pushing in the operating portion 95a, the second opening/closing member 90 is positioned at the minimum open position, and game balls can pass through the second discharge hole 9b, and the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 are discharged from the second discharge hole 9b.
As a result, when the second ball removal button 95 is located closer to the specific position (towards the initial position), the game ball cannot pass through the second discharge hole 9b. On the other hand, when the second ball removal button 95 is located further back from the specific position (towards the lowest position), the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b. As a result, by placing (pushing in) the second ball removal button 95 at the specific position, the minimum opening width that allows the game ball to pass (discharge) is secured as the opening width of the second discharge hole 9b.
Furthermore, when the second ball removal button 95 is pushed to the lowest position, the second opening/closing member 90 is positioned at the maximum open position, which opens the entire second discharge hole 9b and allows two or more balls (five balls in this embodiment) to be discharged simultaneously from the second discharge hole 9b.
Then, when the second ball removal button 95 is positioned in the lowest position and the operating portion 95a is stopped being pressed, the disabling means is deactivated, causing the second opening/closing member 90 to return to the closed position and the second ball removal button 95 to return to its initial position.
As a result of the above, by pressing the second ball removal button 95 (operation section 95a), the player can discharge the game balls stored in the upper tray 8 through the second discharge hole 9b to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (specifically, to the dollar box placed below the tray unit SU).

In particular, in this modified example, the dimensions of the second discharge hole 9b are larger than the dimensions of the first discharge hole 8b. That is, the second discharge hole 9b can simultaneously pass (discharge) more game balls than the first discharge hole 8b. This makes it possible to quickly cancel the full-tank error when an abnormal state occurs in which the upper tray 8 becomes full of game balls and the game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 cannot be sent to the tray (hereinafter referred to as a "full-tank error").
In addition, in this modified example, the first ball removal button 85 can be operated to a level equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball (approximately 11 mm) to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operation amount of 4 mm can bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the specific position is 4 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed in the specific position by pressing it 4 mm from the initial position.
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the upper tray 8 with a small amount of operation.
In addition, in this embodiment, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated with an amount of operation that is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball to put the game ball into a state where it can pass through the second discharge hole 9b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
In particular, the second ball removal button 95 can be operated to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with a smaller operation amount than the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball in a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the operation amount (minimum operation amount) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the operation amount (minimum operation amount) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the second ball removal button 95, an operation amount of 3 mm can bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, the operation amount for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the specific position is 3 mm. In other words, the second ball removal button 95 can be placed in a specific position by pressing it 3 mm from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the specific position" is less than the "operation amount for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the specific position."
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the upper tray 8 with a small amount of operation. In particular, when a player is required to quickly remove balls from the upper tray 8, such as when a full-tank error occurs, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which enables efficient ball removal.

In addition, in this modified example, the second ball removal button 95 can be put into a state where the game ball can pass through the second discharge hole 9b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) with a smaller operating load than the operating load of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball into a state where it can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b. In other words, the operating load (minimum operating load) of the second ball removal button 95 required to put the game ball into a state where it can pass through the second discharge hole 9b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b) is smaller than the operating load (minimum operating load) of the first ball removal button 85 required to put the game ball into a state where it can pass through the first discharge hole 8b (a state where the game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
Specifically, with respect to the first ball removal button 85, an operating load of 4 [N] can be applied to bring the first discharge hole 8b into a state in which a game ball can pass through (a state in which a game ball can be discharged from the first discharge hole 8b).
That is, the operating load required to displace the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position is 4 [N]. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 located at the initial position can be placed at the specific position by pressing it with a force of 4 [N].
On the other hand, with regard to the second ball removal button 95, an operating load of 2 [N] can be applied to bring the second discharge hole 9b into a state in which the game ball can pass through (a state in which the game ball can be discharged from the second discharge hole 9b).
That is, the operating load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position is 2 [N]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95, which is located at the initial position, can be placed at a specific position by pressing it with a force of 2 [N]. In particular, the "operation load required to displace the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to a specific position" is less than the "operation load required to displace the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to a specific position."
This allows the second ball removal button 95 to be operated with less force than the first ball removal button 85. This makes it possible to encourage the player to operate the second ball removal button 95, which allows efficient ball removal, when a full-tank error occurs or other situations require balls to be removed quickly from the upper tray 8.

In addition, in this modified example, the maximum operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 is greater than the maximum operation amount of the lower tray ball removal button 85. In other words, the operation amount of the second ball removal button 95 required to open the second discharge hole 9b to the upper limit (maximum) is greater than the operation amount of the first ball removal button 85 required to open the first discharge hole 8b to the upper limit (maximum).
That is, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or less than the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position is 6 mm. In other words, the first ball removal button 85 can be placed at the lowest position by pushing it in 6 mm from the initial position.
On the other hand, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is equal to or greater than (exceeds) the diameter of the game ball. Specifically, the operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position is 14.5 [mm]. In other words, the second ball removal button 95 can be placed at the lowest position by pressing it 14.5 [mm] from the initial position. In particular, the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the second ball removal button 95 from the initial position to the lowest position" is greater than the "operation amount (maximum operation amount) for displacing the first ball removal button 85 from the initial position to the lowest position."
As a result, of the two ball removal buttons (the first ball removal button 85 and the second ball removal button 95), the ball removal button with the largest maximum operation amount (the second ball removal button 95) becomes the ball removal button with the highest ball removal efficiency. Therefore, when a full-tank error occurs or other situations that require quick ball removal from the upper tray 8, the player can intuitively select ball removal using the second ball removal button 95.

As described above, in this modified example, the first ball removal button 85 can put the first discharge hole 8b in a state where the game ball can pass through it with an amount of operation that is less than the diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal button 95 can put the second discharge hole 9b in a state where the game ball can pass through it with an amount of operation that is less than the diameter of the game ball.
This makes it possible to eject game balls from the upper tray 8 with a small amount of operation of each ball removal button 85, 95.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when discharging game balls from the upper tray 8.

(Variation 4)
In the above embodiment, the third custom state is always set during the execution of a special game, and when a press of the down button is detected during the third custom state, the fourth custom state is initiated in response. During the fourth custom state, the second custom interface image IF2 is displayed on the display screen 31a, making it possible to change the customization content for a predetermined effect custom type depending on the game state.
However, during the latter half of the period in which the variable display of the special symbol (variable performance) is executed, during the waiting period for passing through the hand-link gate, during the jackpot game state, during the right-hand hit period, etc., the second custom interface image IF2 is not displayed, and it may be configured such that it is impossible to change the custom content for all performance custom types (or some of the performance custom types). Note that even during these periods, the settings for the light intensity setting and the volume setting can be changed.
The "waiting period for passing through a consecutive winning gate" is the period from winning a "jackpot" to detecting the passage of the game ball through a specific gate in a gaming machine in which the jackpot game state is initiated when the game ball is detected passing through a specific gate after a "jackpot" is won.

In addition, if the customization content is changed for any of the performance customization types during the variable display of the special pattern, an image indicating that the customization content has been changed may be displayed at the end of the variable display, and a sound indicating that the customization content has been changed may be output. In this case, if a customer waiting state is started while the image indicating that the customization content has been changed is being displayed (while a sound indicating that the customization content has been changed is being output), the display of the image indicating that the customization content has been changed (while a sound indicating that the customization content has been changed is being output) may be terminated midway. On the other hand, if the next variable display of the special pattern is started while the image indicating that the customization content has been changed is being displayed (while a sound indicating that the customization content has been changed is being output), the display of the image indicating that the customization content has been changed (while a sound indicating that the customization content has been changed) may be continued.

In addition, during the period when the volume setting can be changed, a predetermined sound (hereinafter, "change sound") may be output each time the pressing of the volume adjustment button is detected. In particular, during the period when the volume setting can be changed during special play, the change sound may be output every time the pressing of the volume adjustment button is detected. On the other hand, during the period when the volume setting can be changed during the customer waiting state, the change sound may be output each time the pressing of the volume adjustment button is detected during the period from the start of the customer waiting state until a predetermined time has elapsed, and the change sound may not be output even if the pressing of the volume adjustment button is detected during the period after the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state.

1 Pachinko machine 35 Decoration unit detection switch 36 Tray unit detection switch 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board DU Decoration unit SU Tray unit IF1 First custom interface image IF2 Second custom interface image cm Custom change message image

Claims (1)

A frame body to which any one of a plurality of types of accessory members can be attached;
a detection means for detecting a type of the accessory member attached to the frame body when the accessory member is attached to the frame body;
A performance means capable of executing a performance according to the type detected by the detection means ,
the detection means includes a switch circuit provided on the frame and a switching means provided on the accessory member,
A gaming machine characterized in that , when the accessory member is attached to the frame body, the switching means can switch the contact portion of the switch circuit to a conductive state or a non-conductive state .

Images